EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF USER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF USER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FREE ENGLISH EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF MANUAL

If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.

EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF SUMMARY:

How do I attach a lens?

Align the red dot mark on the lens with the red dot mark on the projector.
Gently push the lens toward the projector until it clicks into place.

How do I remove a lens?

Press and hold the lens release button.
Pull the lens away from the projector.

How do I attach and remove the cable cover?

To attach the cable cover

Align the tabs on the cable cover with the slots on the projector.
Gently press the cable cover until it clicks into place.

To remove the cable cover

Pull up on the tab on the cable cover to release it.
Pull the cable cover away from the projector.

How do I install the safety wire?

Thread the safety wire through the safety wire hole on the projector.
Secure the safety wire to a stable object.

How do I install batteries in the remote control?

Slide the battery compartment cover open.
Insert two AA batteries, making sure to match the + and – symbols to the illustrations inside the compartment.
Close the battery compartment cover.

How do I connect to a wired network?

Use a standard Ethernet cable (not included) to connect the projector’s LAN port to your network.
Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Net. Info. – Wired LAN, and then select IP Settings.
Select IP Address Setting, and then select either Auto or Manual to set the IP address.
To select other wired network settings, see “Selecting Wired Network Settings”.

How do I select Wired Network Settings?

Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Net. Info. – Wired LAN, and then select IP Settings.
Select an option and then configure it:

IP Address Setting: Select Auto to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server automatically or Manual to set the IP address manually.
Subnet Mask: If you selected Manual for IP Address Setting, enter your subnet mask.
Gateway Address: If you selected Manual for IP Address Setting, enter your gateway address.
DNS Server: Select Auto to obtain a DNS server address from a DHCP server automatically or Manual to set the DNS server address manually.

How do I install the Wireless LAN Module?

Turn off the projector.
If the external camera is installed, remove it.
Insert the Wireless LAN Module.
Replace the external camera, if you removed it.

How do I use a QR code to connect a mobile device?

Install Epson iProjection on your mobile device.
Make sure your mobile device and projector are on the same network.
Press the LAN button on the projector or select LAN on the Home screen.
Select Display the QR Code in the Network Menu.
Start Epson iProjection on your mobile device and scan the QR code.

How do I use Quick Wireless Connection (Windows)?

Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Wireless Mode, and then select Quick Connection.
Select Search Access Point.
Select your access point from the list of SSIDs displayed.
Enter the passphrase for your access point, if necessary, and then select Next.
Select Complete to save the settings.

How do I select wireless network settings manually?

Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Wireless Mode, and then select Manual Settings.
Select an option and then configure it:

Connection Mode: Select Infrastructure to connect through an access point, or select Ad hoc to connect directly to the projector.
Search Access Point: Select this to search for available access points.
SSID: Select your access point from the list, or manually enter the SSID for your access point.
Security: Select the security method used for your access point.
Passphrase: Enter the passphrase used for your access point.
EAP Method: Select the EAP method used for your access point.
Channel: Select the channel used for your access point.
IP Settings: Set the IP address settings for your projector.

How do I set up wireless network security?

Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Wireless Mode, and then select Security.
Select the security method that matches the settings of your access point.

How do I set up projector network e-mail alerts?

Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Mail Notification, and then select On.
Configure the network e-mail alert settings as needed:

SMTP Server: Enter the host name or IP address of your SMTP server.
Port Number: Enter the port number of your SMTP server. The default is 25.
From: Enter the e-mail address from which the projector will send e-mail alerts.
Address 1/Address 2/Address 3 Setting: Enter up to three e-mail addresses to receive e-mail alerts.

How do I control a networked projector using a web browser?

Make sure your computer and the projector are connected to the same network.
Start a web browser.
In the address bar of your web browser, enter the IP address of the projector.

How do I view an image capture of the displayed image from a remote location?

Log in to the projector’s Web Control page from a web browser.
Select Image Capture.

How do I control a networked projector in content playback mode?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Content Playback, and then select On.

How do I use Crestron Connected?

Make sure the projector and the Crestron control system are on the same network.
If necessary, enable Crestron Connected on the projector using the Crestron Connected option in the Network Menu.
Add the projector to your Crestron control system.

How do I import a web server certificate using the projector menus?

Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Secure HTTP, and then select Web Server Certificate.
Select Import via Menu.
Follow the on-screen instructions to import the web server certificate.

How do I register digital certificates from a USB device?

Copy the digital certificate files to a USB storage device.
Insert the USB storage device into the projector’s USB-A port.
Select Extended, and then select Network Menu.
Select Secure HTTP, and then select Web Server Certificate.
Select Register from USB.
Select the certificate you want to register and then follow the on-screen instructions.

How do I register digital certificates from a web browser?

Log in to the projector’s Web Control page from a web browser.
Select Network, and then select Secure HTTP.
Select Web Server Certificate.
Select Register from Browser.
Select Browse and then select the certificate file you want to import.
Select Import.

How do I turn on the projector?

Press the power button on the projector or on the remote control.

How do I use the Home screen?

When you turn on the projector, the Home screen appears. Use it to quickly access your most frequently used projector settings or to project images from a USB storage device.

To select an item on the Home screen

Select the Home button on the remote control.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to select an item and then press the Enter button.

How do I turn off the projector?

To turn off the projector

Press the power button.
A confirmation message appears. Press the power button again. The status light flashes orange and the projector turns off. The cooling fan continues to run for a short time.

How do I select the language for the projector menus?

Select Extended, and then select Language.
Select your language.

How do I set the date and time?

Select Extended, and then select Date & Time.
Select Date Format.
Select the date format you want to use.
Select Date Setting and set the date.
Select Time Format.
Select the time format you want to use.
Select Time Setting and set the time.

How do I resize the image with the zoom button?

Press the Zoom button on the remote control to activate the zoom feature. The Zoom menu appears on screen.
Use the arrow buttons to select Zoom or Wide, and then press the Enter button.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the image size and then press the Enter button to apply the settings.

How do I focus the image using the focus buttons?

Press the focus buttons on the remote control.

How do I focus the image when using an optional short throw lens?

Press the Menu button on the remote control.
Select the Signal Menu, and then select Focus Adjustment.
Select H Position or V Position to adjust the focus point horizontally or vertically.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to adjust the focus point.
Select Done to exit the menu.

How do I set the screen type?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings Menu, and then select Screen.
Select Screen Type and then select your screen type.

How do I adjust the image position using lens shift?

To adjust lens shift using the projector buttons

Press the Menu button.
Select the Signal Menu, and then select Lens Shift.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the image position and then press the Enter button.

To adjust lens shift using the remote control

Press the Lens Shift button on the remote control. The Lens Shift menu appears on screen.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the image position.
Press the Enter button to save your settings.

How do I adjust the image position using screen position?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction, and then select Screen Position.
Select H Position or V Position and then adjust the image position horizontally or vertically.
Select Done to exit the menu.

How do I display a test pattern?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Test Pattern, and then select the test pattern you want to display.
The test pattern you selected appears. To exit the test pattern, press the Menu, Esc, or Enter button.

How do I adjust the image height?

Make sure the projector is turned on and an image is projected.
Press the Menu button to open the on-screen menu.
Select the Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction and then select Image Height.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to adjust the image height.
When you are finished, select Done.

How do I correct image shape with H/V-Keystone?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction, and then select H/V-Keystone.
Adjust the horizontal and vertical keystone correction as necessary, and then select Done.

How do I correct image shape with quick corner?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction, and then select Quick Corner.
Select a corner to adjust, and then adjust the shape using the arrow buttons.
Repeat step 3 for the other corners as necessary, and then select Done.

How do I correct image shape with curved surface?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction, and then select Curved Surface.
Adjust the image shape as necessary, and then select Done.

How do I correct image shape with corner wall?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction, and then select Corner Wall.
Adjust the image shape as necessary, and then select Done.

How do I correct image shape with point correction?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Geometry Correction, and then select Point Correction.
Select a point to adjust, and then adjust the position using the arrow buttons.
Repeat step 3 for the other points as necessary, and then select Done.

How do I select an image source?

You can select an image source using the remote control or the projector buttons.

To select an image source using the remote control

Press the source button that corresponds to the image source you want to select. For details on the source buttons, see “Projector Parts – Remote Control”.
The input signal is automatically detected and switching occurs. If switching does not occur, you may need to adjust the settings. See “Auto Source Search”.

How do I change the projection mode using the remote control?

Press the Mode button.
Use the arrow buttons to select the mode you want to use, and then press the Enter button.

How do I change the projection mode using the menus?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Image Menu, and then select Color Mode.
Select the mode you want to use.

How do I change the image aspect ratio?

Select Image Menu.
Select Aspect.
Select the aspect ratio that matches your image.

How do I change the color mode?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Image Menu, and then select Color Mode.
Select the mode you want to use.

How do I adjust the brightness?

Select Image Menu.
Select Brightness.
Adjust the brightness level using the arrow buttons.

How do I control the volume with the volume buttons?

Press the volume buttons on the remote control.

How do I project in content playback mode?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Content Playback, and then select On.
Insert a USB storage device that contains image, video, or audio files into the projector’s USB-A port.
Select a file to project.

How do I project a playlist in content playback mode?

Select Extended, and then select Settings Menu.
Select Content Playback, and then select Playlist.
Create a new playlist or select an existing playlist.
Add files to the playlist.

How do I add effects to the projected image?

You can add the following effects to the projected image:

Masking: Blacks out selected portions of the image.
Freeze: Freezes the projected image.

To add an effect to the projected image

Press the Menu button.
Select Settings Menu > Content Playback > Effects.
Select the effect you want to use.

How do I use the projector’s menus?

To open the menu

Press the Menu button on the remote control. The top-level menu appears.
Use the arrow buttons to highlight a menu and then press the Enter button to select it.
Use the arrow buttons to highlight a menu option and then press the Enter button to select it.

To close the menu

Press the Menu, Esc, or Enter button.

What are the image menu settings?

Color Mode: Changes the image color mode.
Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the image.
Contrast: Adjusts the contrast of the image.
Color Saturation: Adjusts the color saturation of the image.
Tint: Adjusts the color balance between green and red.
Sharpness: Adjusts the sharpness of the image.
White Balance: Adjusts the white point.
Image Preset Mode: Selects an image preset mode.
Frame Interpolation: Adjusts frame interpolation.
Super-resolution: Adjusts the super-resolution settings.
Scene Adaptive Gamma: Adjusts the scene adaptive gamma settings.
Gamma: Adjusts gamma correction.
RGBCMY: Adjusts the gain and bias for each color.
Dynamic Contrast: Adjusts the dynamic contrast ratio.
Lights-Out Control: Automatically lowers the light output of the projector if it detects that no image signal is being sent. This reduces power consumption when the projector is turned on, but not being used.
Reset (Image Menu): Resets all Image menu settings to their defaults.

What are the signal menu settings?

Aspect: Selects the aspect ratio that matches your image.
Blanking: Selects how to blank the image when no signal is detected.
Color Space: Adjusts the color space settings.
Dynamic Range: Selects the dynamic range setting.
Video Range: Selects how the projector processes the input signal’s range.
EDID: Selects the EDID setting.
Scale: Adjusts the image size.
Switch Backup Source: Sets up a backup source to switch to if the current source is unavailable.
Reset (Signal Menu): Resets all Signal menu settings to their defaults.

What are the settings menu settings?

Geometry Correction: Adjusts the geometry settings for the projected image.
Volume: Adjusts the projector speaker volume.
HDMI Link: Configures the HDMI Link settings.
Control Panel Lock: Prevents changes from being made using the projector buttons.
Lens Lock: Locks the lens adjustment settings.
Light Source Mode: Selects the projector’s light source mode.
Brightness Level: Adjusts the brightness level of the projector.
Constant Brightness: Maintains a constant brightness level for the life of the projector.
Estimated Remains: Displays the estimated remaining life of the light source in hours.
Energy Saving Mode: Selects the projector’s energy saving mode.
Remote Receiver: Changes the position of the remote control receiver.
User Button: Assigns a function to the User button on the remote control.
Test Pattern: Selects a test pattern to display.
Memory: Registers and recalls up to 10 sets of projector settings.
Content Playback: Projects photos, videos, and music stored on a USB storage device.
NFC Settings: Allows you to use an NFC-enabled Android device to view network information, install Epson iProjection, or connect to the projector.
Reset (Settings Menu): Resets all Settings menu settings to their defaults.

What are the extended menu settings?

Home Screen: Configures the projector’s Home screen.
Menu Position: Changes the on-screen menu position.
Message Position: Changes the on-screen message position.
Messages: Selects the on-screen messages that you want to appear.
Display Background: Changes the display background.
Startup Screen: Displays a user-selected image when the projector is turned on.
Standby Confirmation: Turns the standby confirmation message on or off.
Air Filter Notice: Selects the frequency for the air filter replacement message.
Screen: Configures the screen settings.
Panel Alignment: Aligns the projector panels to prevent color discrepancies.
Color Uniformity: Improves color uniformity across the screen.
OSD Rotation: Rotates the on-screen menu.
User’s Logo: Adds your logo to the projected image.
Projection: Configures the projection settings.
Direct Power On: Turns on the projector as soon as it’s plugged into an electrical outlet.
Sleep Mode: Turns off the projector automatically if it’s idle for a specified period of time.
Sleep Mode Timer: Sets the amount of time the projector must be idle before it turns off automatically.
High Altitude Mode: Optimizes the cooling fan for operation at high altitudes.
Auto Source Search: Sets the projector to search for input signals automatically.
Auto Power On: Turns the projector on automatically when an input signal is detected.
Startup Source: Selects the source to display when the projector is turned on.
Quick Startup: Starts projecting more quickly.
USB Power: Controls whether the USB-A port provides power when the projector is off.
A/V Mute Settings: Configures the A/V mute settings.
Beep: Turns the projector’s beeps on or off.
Indicators: Turns the projector’s status light and lamp indicator on or off.
Log Save Destination: Selects where to save the projector’s log file.
Batch Setup Range: Selects the range of projectors to include when using the batch setup feature.
AC Voltage Monitoring: Turns AC voltage monitoring on or off.
Date & Time: Sets the date and time.
Lens Calibration: Calibrates the lens settings.
A/V Settings: Adjusts the A/V settings.
Standby Mode: Sets the standby mode.
HDBaseT: Configures the HDBaseT settings.
Color Calibration: Adjusts the color calibration settings.
Projector ID: Assigns a unique ID number to the projector.
Batch Setup: Configures the batch setup settings.
Projector Grouping: Creates groups of projectors that you can control simultaneously.
Tiling: Splits the screen into a grid of tiles.
Edge Blending: Blends the edges of overlapping images for seamless multi-screen projection.
Black Level: Adjusts the brightness of black areas of the image.
Reset (Multi-Projection Menu): Resets all multi-projection menu settings to their defaults.
Screen Matching: Matches the brightness and color of images from multiple projectors.
Color Matching: Matches the color of images from multiple projectors.
Simple Stacking: Adjusts the brightness level when two projectors are stacked to create a brighter image.
Simple Blending: Adjusts the image brightness to blend images from multiple projectors smoothly.
Schedule Settings: Creates a schedule for turning the projector on and off and displaying messages.
Language: Selects the language for the on-screen menus.
Reset (Extended Menu): Resets all Extended menu settings to their defaults.

What are the network menu settings?

Wireless Mode: Select this menu to configure the wireless settings for the projector.
Net. Info. – Wireless LAN: Displays the wireless LAN status information.
Net. Info. – Wired LAN: Displays the wired LAN status information.
Display the QR Code: Displays a QR code that you can scan with Epson iProjection to connect to the projector wirelessly.
Remote Camera Access: Allows you to access the projector’s built-in camera or optional external camera from a web browser.
Projector Name: Allows you to enter a name for the projector.
PJLink Password: Sets a password for using PJLink to control the projector over a network.
Remote Password: Sets a password for using the Epson iProjection app to control the projector over a network.
Web Control Password: Sets a password for using the projector’s Web Control feature.
Monitor Password: Sets a password for monitoring the projector status over a network.
Moderator Password: Sets a password for using the moderator features on the projector’s Web Control page.
Projector Keyword: Allows you to enter a keyword that can be used to search for the projector on a network.
Display Keyword: Allows you to enter a keyword that can be used to search for the projector on a network when it is in standby mode.
Display LAN Info: Displays the projector’s network settings.
Connection Mode: Select Infrastructure to connect through an access point, or select Ad hoc to connect directly to the projector.
Search Access Point: Select this to search for available access points.
SSID: Select your access point from the list, or manually enter the SSID for your access point.
Security: Select the security method used for your access point.
Passphrase: Enter the passphrase used for your access point.
EAP Method: Select the EAP method used for your access point.
Channel: Select the channel used for your access point.
IP Settings: Sets the IP address settings for the projector.
SSID Display: Select whether or not to display the SSID when the projector is in standby mode.
IP Address Display: Select whether or not to display the IP address when the projector is in standby mode.
IPv6 Settings: Sets the IPv6 address settings for the projector.
Mail Notification: Turns the projector’s e-mail notification feature on or off.
SMTP Server: Enter the host name or IP address of your SMTP server.
Port Number: Enter the port number of your SMTP server. The default is 25.
From: Enter the e-mail address from which the projector will send e-mail alerts.
Address 1/Address 2/Address 3 Setting: Enter up to three e-mail addresses to receive e-mail alerts.
SNMP: Turns the projector’s SNMP feature on or off.
Trap IP Address 1/Trap IP Address 2: Enter the IP address of a computer or network device that will receive SNMP traps.
Community Name: Enter the community name for SNMP.
PJLink Notification: Turns PJLink notifications on or off.
Notified IP Address: Enter the IP addresses that you want to receive PJLink notifications.
Command Communication: Sets how the projector responds to PJLink commands when it is in standby mode.
Secure HTTP: Turns the projector’s Secure HTTP feature on or off.
Web Server Certificate: Registers, deletes, and sets web server certificates used for Secure HTTP.
Web API Settings: Turns the projector’s web API feature on or off.
Priority Gateway: Specifies the priority for the wired LAN or wireless LAN when both are in use.
Basic Control: Turns basic projector control features on or off.
PJLink: Turns PJLink projector control on or off.
AMX Device Discovery: Allows AMX control systems to discover the projector on the network.
Crestron Connected: Allows Crestron control systems to discover the projector on the network.
Crestron Xio Cloud: Allows Crestron Xio Cloud to discover and control the projector on the network.
Art-Net: Allows you to control the projector using the Art-Net protocol.
sACN: Allows you to control the projector using the sACN protocol.
Message Broadcasting: Turns the message broadcasting feature on or off.
Reset (Network Menu): Resets all Network menu settings to their defaults.

What are the info menu settings?

Projector Info: Displays information about the projector, such as the product name, serial number, and operating hours.
Light Source Info: Displays information about the projector’s light source, such as the estimated remaining life and operating hours.
Version: Displays the projector’s firmware version.
Status Information: Displays the projector’s current status, such as the input signal, lamp mode, and temperature.
Voltage Warning Info: Displays information about the projector’s AC voltage warning.
Temp Warning Info: Displays information about the projector’s temperature warning.
Power On/Off History: Displays the projector’s power on/off history.
Firmware Update: Updates the projector’s firmware.

What are some ways of adjusting projector features?

You can shut off the picture and sound temporarily (A/V Mute) or stop the video action temporarily.

How do you shut off the picture and sound temporarily (A/V Mute)?

Press the A/V Mute button on the remote control.
The screen goes blank, the A/V Mute indicator appears, and the lamp brightness is reduced to save power.
Press the A/V Mute button, any other button on the remote control, or a button on the projector’s control panel to restore the picture and sound.

How do you stop video action temporarily?

Press the button on the remote control.

What are the projector security features?

You can protect the projector from unauthorized use by using these security features:

Password protection
Locking the projector’s control panel buttons
Locking the projector’s lens settings

What are the password security types?

Projector Password: Prevents the projector from being used unless the correct password is entered.
Network Password: Prevents unauthorized users from accessing the projector’s network settings. This password can be set independently of the Projector Password.

How do you set a password?

Select the Menu → Extended → Security → Password Setting menu command.
Select On next to Projector Password or Network Password.
Enter a password of up to 32 characters. You can use letters, numbers, and symbols (!@#$%^&*_) in your password.
Select Enter.
Enter the password again to confirm it and select Enter.

How do you select password security types?

Select the Menu → Extended → Security → Password Security menu command.
Select a security type:
- Type-A: Requires you to enter a password when the projector is turned on if a password is set.
- Type-B: Requires you to enter a password to operate the projector when a password is set. You can also set a Network Password independently of the Projector Password.

How do you enter a password to use the projector?

When you turn on the projector or try to access a protected menu item, the Password entry screen appears.

Use the arrow buttons to select characters and the Enter button to input your password.
Select OK to enter the projector menu.

How do you save a user’s logo image to display?

You can display a user logo on the start-up screen.

Copy the desired image file (JPEG, PNG, BMP; max 1 MB) to a USB flash drive.
Insert the USB flash drive into the projector’s USB-A port.
Select the Menu → Extended → Security → Logo Setting → Select from USB menu command.
Select the image you want to use and then select OK.

How do you lock the projector’s lens settings and buttons?

You can lock the projector’s buttons and lens settings to prevent unauthorized adjustments.

Select the Menu → Extended → Security → Key Lock menu command.
Select the items you want to lock:
- Lens Settings: Locks the lens settings (zoom, focus, and lens shift) to prevent changes.
- Control Panel Buttons: Locks the buttons on the projector’s control panel to prevent changes.
Select On next to each item you want to lock and then select OK.

How do you unlock the projector’s buttons?

Select the Menu → Extended → Security → Key Lock menu command.
Select Off next to Control Panel Buttons and then select OK.

How do you lock the remote control buttons?

You can lock the remote control buttons to prevent unauthorized adjustments to the projector.

Press and hold the Menu button on the remote control until the lamp indicator flashes twice.

How do you use advanced image adjustment features?

You can further refine the image using these advanced image adjustment features.

Image Presets: Quickly apply image settings that are optimized for different types of content and projection environments.
Frame Interpolation: Improves the appearance of fast-moving images by creating new frames and inserting them between existing frames.
Super-resolution: Improves the clarity of scaled resolution images.
Panel Alignment: Adjusts the color convergence, correcting any color fringing that may appear around the edges of images.
Color Uniformity: Corrects uneven color distribution, ensuring consistent color across the entire projected image.

How do you create image presets?

You can create custom Image Presets based on your current image settings.

Adjust the image quality settings to the desired levels.
Select the Menu → Image → Image Preset → Save Image Preset menu command.
Select the preset number (1–10) where you want to save the current settings.

You can overwrite an existing preset or save to an empty preset number.
Select Yes.

How do you use frame interpolation?

Select the Menu → Extended → Image Option → Frame Interpolation menu command.
Select a setting:
- Off: Turns off Frame Interpolation.
- Low: Applies a minimal amount of interpolation to improve the smoothness of motion without introducing noticeable artifacts.
- Medium: Applies a moderate amount of interpolation.
- High: Applies the maximum amount of interpolation, creating the smoothest motion but potentially introducing more noticeable artifacts.
Select OK.

How do you adjust scaled resolution images (Super-resolution)?

Select the Menu → Extended → Image Option → Super-resolution menu command.
Select a setting.
- Off: Turns off Super-resolution.
- Level 1: Applies a minimal amount of Super-resolution to enhance image details without introducing noticeable artifacts.
- Level 2: Applies a moderate amount of Super-resolution.
- Level 3: Applies the maximum amount of Super-resolution, providing the sharpest image detail but potentially introducing more noticeable artifacts.
Select OK.

How do you adjust the color convergence (Panel alignment)?

If you notice color fringing around the edges of an image, adjust the color convergence (also known as panel alignment).

Select the Menu → Extended → Image Option → Panel Alignment → Pixel Alignment menu command.
Select Adjust.

A grid pattern with adjustment areas (zones) appears on the screen.
Use the arrow buttons to select a zone and then select OK.

A zoomed-in view of the selected zone appears on the screen.
Use the arrow buttons to align the red, green, and blue pixels until the colors are properly converged and there is no fringing.

You can select the Previous Zone or Next Zone buttons to quickly move between adjustment zones.
Select OK.

How do you adjust the color tone (Color Uniformity)?

The Color Uniformity feature improves color consistency across the entire screen by correcting uneven color distribution.

Display a white image on the screen.
Select the Menu → Extended → Image Option → Color Uniformity menu command.
Select Start and wait until the message Completed! appears.
To further adjust color uniformity, select the Color Uniformity → Detail Adjust menu command and select Start.

A grid pattern with adjustment areas (zones) appears on the screen.
Use the arrow buttons to select a zone and then select OK.

A zoomed-in view of the selected zone appears on the screen.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the brightness of the selected zone to match the surrounding areas.

You can select the Previous Zone or Next Zone buttons to quickly move between adjustment zones.
Select OK.

How do you run light source calibration?

The projector automatically performs Light Source Calibration as needed. You can also manually run Light Source Calibration using the following procedure:

Display a white image on the screen.
Select the Menu → Extended → Image Option → Light Source Calibration menu command.
Select Start.
Do not operate the projector or change the projected image while calibration is in progress.

When calibration is complete, the message Completed! appears on the screen and the projector returns to the previous screen.
If the message Light source calibration failed appears on the screen, try the following:
- Clean the air filter.
- Make sure the room is well-ventilated and the projector’s air vents are not blocked.
- Restart the projector and try again.
- If the error continues, contact Epson for assistance.

How do you use multiple projectors?

You can use this projector in a multiple projector setup to create a single large image or enhance brightness.

Edge Blending: Overlaps the edges of projected images and adjusts the brightness of the overlapped area to create a seamless, single image from multiple projectors.
Stacking: Overlays images from multiple projectors to increase brightness and create a more impactful presentation.
Tiling: Arranges multiple projected images in a grid to create a large, composite image.

You can use the Epson Projector Professional Tool software to simplify projector setup and configuration in multiple projector installations.

What is the multiple projector adjustment overview?

Install projectors so that the image from each projector is aligned and edges are touching.
Identify the projectors and control them from a single location.
Adjust the image geometry for each projector. If you are tiling images, use the Screen Position settings on each projector to adjust the position and size of the projected image. If you are blending or stacking images, use the Geometric Correction feature on each projector to adjust the shape and position of the projected image to perfectly match the adjacent projected images.
Adjust the image blending or stacking. If you are using Edge Blending, use the Edge Blending feature on each projector to adjust the brightness of the overlapped areas. If you are using Stacking, use the Stacking feature on each projector to adjust the brightness of the overlaid images.

What is the projector identification system for multiple projector control?

You can use the Projector ID feature to identify and control multiple projectors from a central location.

Projector ID: Identifies individual projectors. You can set the Projector ID for each projector.
Remote Control ID: Allows the remote control to control a specific projector. You can set the Remote Control ID on the remote control to match the Projector ID of the projector you want to control.

How do you set the projector ID?

Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Projector ID menu command.
Select a number (1–31).

How do you set the remote control ID?

Press and hold the Input and Menu buttons on the remote control for three seconds.

The Remote Control ID Setting screen appears.
Press the number buttons on the remote control to select the desired Remote Control ID (1–31).
- Press the 1 and 0 buttons to select a Remote Control ID of 10.
- Press the 2 and 0 buttons to select a Remote Control ID of 20.
- Press the 3 and 1 buttons to select a Remote Control ID of 31.
Press the Enter button to confirm the selection.

How do you blend using the Epson Projector Professional Tool Software?

Connect all the projectors in the multi-projection system to the same network.
Start the Epson Projector Professional Tool software on your computer.
Select Multi-Projection and then select Edge Blending.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the edge blending process.

How do you stack using the Epson Projector Professional Tool Software?

Connect all the projectors in the multi-projection system to the same network.
Start the Epson Projector Professional Tool software on your computer.
Select Multi-Projection and then select Stacking.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the stacking process.

How do you stack and blend using the Epson Projector Professional Tool Software?

Connect all the projectors in the multi-projection system to the same network.
Start the Epson Projector Professional Tool software on your computer.
Select Multi-Projection and then select Stacking and Blending.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the stacking and edge blending process.

How do you tile images into one image?

You can use the Tiling feature to project a single image using multiple projectors, which is useful for creating large, high-resolution displays.

You can combine up to 16 projectors in a 4 x 4 matrix.
You can adjust the tiling configuration automatically or manually.

How do you configure tiling automatically?

Connect all the projectors in the tiling system to the same network and arrange them in a grid pattern.
- Each projector should project an image that slightly overlaps the adjacent images.
Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Tiling → Auto Setup menu command on one of the projectors.
Select the projector that is projecting the top left corner of the image.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the setup process.

How do you configure tiling manually?

Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Tiling → Manual Setup menu command.
Select the Screen Position option and adjust the settings to position the image for each projector.
Select the Tiling Position option to select the grid position of the current projector.
Repeat steps 1–3 for each projector.

How do you blend the image edges?

When edge blending images, you can adjust the width and blend level of the blend area.

Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Edge Blending menu command.
Select the blend pattern that best matches the arrangement of your projectors.
Select Next.
Use the arrow buttons to select Width and adjust the width of the blend area.
Use the arrow buttons to select Level and adjust the blend level for the selected blend area.
Repeat steps 4–5 for each blend area.

How do you adjust the black level?

Projectors have slightly different black levels, so you need to adjust them when edge blending or stacking images.

Project a black image from all the projectors you are using for the edge blending or stacking.
Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Black Level Adjust menu command on one of the projectors.
Select the projector that appears the brightest and then select OK.
The black level of the selected projector is set as the standard.
Select Adjust next to each of the remaining projectors.
Adjust the Brightness setting until the brightness of the projected image matches the standard.
Select OK.

How do you match tint and brightness (Screen Matching)?

Projectors may have slightly different color and brightness levels. You can use the Screen Matching feature to adjust the color and brightness of each projector to match the others in a multiple projector setup.

What are the screen matching conditions?

You can only use Screen Matching when the following conditions are met:

You are projecting images from multiple projectors.
You have selected a multi-projection mode (Edge Blending, Stacking, or Tiling).

How do you match the screens manually?

Project a white image from all projectors.
Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Screen Matching menu command.
Select the projector you want to use as the standard.

The standard projector will not be adjusted.
Select Adjust next to each of the remaining projectors.
Adjust the settings to match the standard:
- Brightness: Adjusts the overall image brightness.
- R-Tint, G-Tint, B-Tint: Adjusts the tint (hue) of the image in the red, green, and blue color channels.
Select OK.

How do you scale an image?

You can scale an image projected from a computer to a maximum of 1000%.

Select the Menu → Extended → Screen → Scaling menu command.
Use the left/right arrow buttons to adjust the scaling percentage.

What is simple blending for one large image?

You can use Simple Blending to create a seamless, panoramic image by overlapping the images of two projectors.

Adjust the black levels of the projectors. See “Adjusting the Black Level”.
Do not use the Simple Blending feature with other multi-projection features.
Do not use the Simple Blending feature when projecting a 3D image.

What are the simple blending conditions?

You can only use Simple Blending when the following conditions are met:

You are projecting images from two projectors.
The two projectors are arranged side-by-side, and the images are overlapped.

How do you set up Simple Blending?

Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Simple Blending menu command.
Select On.
Use the Test Pattern option to adjust the overlap and alignment of the projected images.
When the images are properly aligned, select Edge Blending.
Select the blend area you want to adjust and then use the arrow buttons to adjust the Level setting to blend the edges of the images.
Repeat step 5 for each blend area.

What is simple stacking for one bright image?

You can use Simple Stacking to overlay the images of two projectors, creating one bright image with enhanced color and contrast.

Adjust the black levels of the projectors. See “Adjusting the Black Level.”
Do not use the Simple Stacking feature with other multi-projection features.
Do not use the Simple Stacking feature when projecting a 3D image.

What are the simple stacking conditions?

You can only use Simple Stacking when the following conditions are met:

You are projecting images from two projectors.
The two projectors are arranged side-by-side, and the images are overlapped.

How do you set up simple stacking?

Select the Menu → Extended → Multi-Projection → Simple Stacking menu command.
Select On.
Use the Test Pattern option to adjust the overlap and alignment of the projected images.

How do you save settings to memory and use saved settings?

You can save up to 10 sets of menu settings, including image adjustment settings, to the projector’s memory. This allows you to quickly recall your preferred settings.

Adjust the projector’s menu settings to the desired levels.
Select the Menu → Memory → Memory Save → Save Settings menu command.
Select the memory number (1–10) where you want to save the current settings. You can overwrite an existing preset or save to an empty preset number.
Select Yes.

To recall saved settings:

Select the Menu → Memory → Memory Recall → Load Settings menu command.
Select the memory number where you saved the settings you want to use.

How do you save a scheduled event?

You can schedule the projector to turn on and off, change its input source, and change its projection mode at specified times.

To create a scheduled event:

Select the Menu → Extended → Scheduled Event → Event Time Setting menu command.
Select a number (1–5) for the scheduled event you want to create. You can overwrite an existing scheduled event or save to an empty number.
Select On Time or Off Time and then use the arrow buttons to set the day and time for the projector to turn on or off.
Optionally, you can select Source and select the input source you want the projector to use.
Select Projection Mode and select the projection mode you want the projector to use.
Select Save.

To enable or disable a scheduled event:

Select the Menu → Extended → Scheduled Event → Event Select menu command.
Select On or Off next to the event number you want to enable or disable.

How do you view scheduled events?

Select the Menu → Extended → Scheduled Event → Event List menu command.

How do you edit a scheduled event?

Select the Menu → Extended → Scheduled Event → Event Time Setting menu command.
Select the number for the scheduled event you want to edit.
Adjust the scheduled event settings as needed.
Select Save.

How do you copy menu settings between projectors?

You can copy menu settings from one projector to another identical model to simplify setup. Do not copy settings to a different projector model. For details, see your projector’s online help.

To copy settings from one projector to another:

Connect the two projectors with a LAN cable.
On the projector that has the settings you want to copy, select the Menu → Extended → Setting Copy → Save Setting menu command.
Select the setting items you want to copy and then select Save.
Turn off both projectors.
On the projector that you want to copy the settings to, select the Menu → Extended → Setting Copy → Load Setting menu command.
Select Yes.
Wait for the settings to be copied.
Disconnect the LAN cable.

How do you save settings to a USB flash drive?

Insert a USB flash drive into the projector’s USB-A port.
Select the Menu → Extended → Setting Copy → Save Setting to USB menu command.
Select the setting items you want to save to the USB flash drive and then select Save.

How do you transfer settings from a USB flash drive?

Insert the USB flash drive into the projector’s USB-A port.
Select the Menu → Extended → Setting Copy → Load Setting from USB menu command.
Select Yes.

How do you save settings to a computer?

Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.
Start a web browser on your computer and enter the projector’s IP address in the address bar.
Click the Extended tab and then click Setting Copy.
Select the setting items you want to save and then click Save to File.
Follow the on-screen instructions to save the settings file to your computer.

How do you transfer settings from a computer?

Connect the projector to a computer using a LAN cable.
Start a web browser on your computer and enter the projector’s IP address in the address bar.
Click the Extended tab and then click Setting Copy.
Click Choose File and select the settings file you want to transfer.
Click Load.

What are some projector maintenance tips?

Keep the lens and projector case clean.
Perform regular air filter and vent maintenance.
Replace the air filter as needed.

How do you clean the lens?

Clean the projector’s lens if you notice dust or other contamination.

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Remove any dust from the lens using a blower brush.
Moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens cleaner and gently wipe the lens.
Wipe the lens again with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

Important:

Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents, or alcohol to clean the lens.
Excessive force may damage the lens.

How do you clean the projector case?

Clean the projector case if you notice dust or other contamination.

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth to wipe any dust or dirt off the projector case.
If necessary, you can moisten the cloth with a mild detergent solution.
Wipe the case again with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

Important:

Do not use abrasive cleaners, solvents, or alcohol to clean the case.
Do not allow moisture to get inside the projector.

How do you perform air filter and vent maintenance?

If you notice dust buildup on the air filter, you can clean it by vacuuming or washing it.

Replace the air filter when it is worn or damaged, or if you notice a decrease in airflow.
Check the air vents regularly to make sure they are not blocked.

How do you clean the air filter?

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Open the air filter cover and remove the air filter.
Clean the air filter by vacuuming it or washing it gently with a mild detergent solution.
- If you wash the air filter, rinse it thoroughly and let it air dry completely before re-installing it.
Re-install the air filter and close the air filter cover.

Important:

Do not operate the projector without the air filter installed.
Do not use excessive force when cleaning the air filter, as this could damage it.

How do you replace the air filter?

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Open the air filter cover and remove the old air filter.
Insert a new air filter and make sure it is seated properly.
Close the air filter cover.

How do you replace the remote control batteries?

Slide open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control.
Remove the old batteries.
Insert two new AA batteries, making sure to match the + and – symbols on the batteries with the symbols in the battery compartment.
Close the battery compartment cover.

How do you transport the projector?

Whenever possible, transport the projector in its original packaging. This will help protect the projector from damage.

Important:

Let the projector cool down completely before transporting it.
Do not place any heavy objects on top of the projector.
Do not subject the projector to strong shocks or vibrations.

What are some projection problem tips?

Make sure the projector is properly connected to a power source and the power switch is turned on.
Make sure the input source is properly connected to the projector and is turned on.
Make sure the correct input source is selected on the projector.
Make sure the projector lens is clean.
Make sure the projector is not too close to or too far from the screen.
Make sure there are no obstructions between the projector and the screen.
Adjust the projector’s image settings as needed.

What does each color on the projector light status mean?

Color	Status
Power light
Blue (solid)	The projector is turned on.
Orange (solid)	The projector is in standby mode.
Orange (flashing)	The projector is warming up or cooling down.
Red (flashing)	An error has occurred. See “Projector Help Displays.”
Lamp light
Green (solid)	The lamp is on.
Green (flashing)	The lamp is warming up or cooling down.
Red (flashing)	The lamp is at the end of its service life and needs to be replaced. The lamp may also flash red if the lamp cover is open or the lamp is not properly seated. For details, see the troubleshooting information in your projector’s online help.
Temperature light
Orange (flashing)	The projector is overheating. Check the air filter and vents to make sure they are not blocked. If the problem continues, turn off the projector and contact Epson for assistance.
Network light
Green (solid)	The projector is connected to a wired network.
Green (flashing)	The projector is sending or receiving data over a wired network.

How can I download the Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide?

You can download the latest software and documentation from the Epson web site. Go to epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America) and select your projector.

Where can I find instructions for Epson Creative Projection?

Instructions are included with the app (instructions included with the app available only in English)

Where can I download Epson Creative Projection?

You can download the latest software and documentation from the Apple App Store.

Where can I find instructions for the Epson Projector Configuration Tool?

Instructions are included with the app (instructions included with the app available only in English).

Where can I download the Epson Projector Configuration Tool?

You can download the latest software and documentation from the Apple App Store or Google Play Store.

Where can I purchase screens, other optional accessories, and replacement parts for my projector in the U.S. and Canada?

You can purchase screens, other optional accessories, and replacement parts from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest reseller, call 800-GO-EPSON (800-463-7766) in the U.S. or 800-807-7766 in Canada. Or you can purchase online at epsonstore.com (U.S. sales) or epsonstore.ca (Canadian sales).

Where can I purchase optional accessories and replacement parts for my projector in Latin America?

You can purchase optional accessories and replacement parts from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest reseller, go to latin.epson.com. Or you can contact your nearest sales office as described in “Where to Get Help.”

Where can I find the most recent list of accessories for my projector?

Visit the Epson web site and search for your product.

What is the part number for the Air filter?

V13H134A46

What is the part number for the External air filter?

V13H134AD0

What is the part number for the PixAlign camera?

V12HA46010

What is the part number for the Wireless LAN module?

V12H005A02

What is the part number for the HDBaseT Transmitter?

V12H547020

What is the part number for the Remote control cable set?

V12H005C28

What is the part number for the Epson DC-13 document camera?

V12H757020

What is the part number for the Epson DC-21 document camera?

V12H758020

What is the part number for the Ultra short-throw lens?

V12H004X0B

What is the part number for the Ultra short-throw lens (white)?

V12H004Y0B

What is the part number for the Short-throw #1 zoom lens?

V12H004UA3

What is the part number for the Short-throw #2 zoom lens?

V12H004U04

What is the part number for the Wide-throw #1 zoom lens?

V12H004W05

What is the part number for the Wide-throw #2 zoom lens?

V12H004W06

What is the part number for the Wide-throw #3 zoom lens?

V12H004W08

What is the part number for the Middle-throw #2 zoom lens?

V12H004M0F

What is the part number for the Middle-throw #3 zoom lens?

V12H004M0A

What is the part number for the Middle-throw #4 zoom lens?

V12H004M0B

What is the part number for the Long-throw zoom lens?

V12H004L08

What is the part number for the Projector ceiling mount?

V12HA54010

What is the part number for the Suspension adapter?

V12HA55010

What is the part number for the Active speakers?

V12H467020

What is the part number for the LANG rigging frame?

V12H996A01

Where can I register my product online in the U.S. and Canada?

epson.com/webreg

Where can I register my product online in Latin America?

latin.epson.com/registro

What are the guidelines for the notations in the PDF?

Warnings must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury.
Cautions must be observed to avoid damage to your equipment.
Notes contain important information about your projector.
Tips contain additional projection information.

Where can I view FAQs and e-mail questions to Epson technical support 24 hours a day?

epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America)

Where can I find details about the Epson PrivateLine Support service?

“Where to Get Help”

What is the description of the Air intake vents?

Takes in air to cool the projector

What is the description of the Projection lens?

Projects images

What is the warning for the Projection lens?

Do not look into the projection lens while projecting.

What is the caution for the Projection lens?

Do not place any objects or put your hand near the projection lens. It could cause burns, fire, or the object to warp because this area reaches a high temperature due to the concentrated projection light.

What is the description of the Remote receivers?

Receives signals from the remote control

What is the description of the Projector status lights?

Indicates the projector’s status

What is the description of the Air filter cover/intake vent?

Takes in air to cool the projector

What is the description of the USB-A port?

Use to install the wireless LAN unit

What is the description of the Wireless LAN module indicator light?

Indicates the access status of the wireless LAN unit

What is the description of the Cable cover?

Cover for the rear interface ports

What is the description of the Lens replacement cover?

Remove while attaching or removing the lens

What is the caution for the Lens replacement cover?

When moving the projector, do not hold the lens replacement cover. The lens replacement cover may detach and the projector may fall, which could cause an injury.

What is the description of the Air exhaust vents?

Exhaust vent for air used to cool the projector internally

What is the caution for the Air exhaust vents?

While projecting, do not put your face or hands near the air exhaust vent, and do not place objects that may become warped or damaged by heat near the vent. Hot air from the air exhaust vent could cause burns, warping, or accidents to occur.

What is the description of the AC power inlet?

Connects the power cord to the projector

What is the description of the Control panel?

Operates the projector

What is the description of the Kensington security slot?

The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver Security System manufactured by Kensington. For more details on the Microsaver Security System, visit the Kensington Web site.

What is the description of the NFC tag?

Uses NFC technology to transfer projector information through your mobile device. The Projector Config Tool app lets you scan projector information and write settings. You can download the Projector Config Tool app for free from the App Store or Google Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.

What is the description of the Interface ports?

Connects interface cables

What is the function of the Audio Out port (Stereo pin mini jack)?

Outputs audio from the current input source to an external speaker. You can also connect the projector to an amplifier with speakers. To output audio from the speaker connected to this port, select Projector as the Audio Out Device setting in the projector’s Settings menu. When an audio/video system is not connected to the projector, audio is output from the speaker connected to this port even if Audio Out Device is set to A/V System.

How can I output audio for the HDMI source from the external speakers when the projector is turned off?

Select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector’s Extended menu. Settings > HDMI Link > Audio Out Device

How can I output audio for the HDMI source from the external speakers when the projector is turned off?

Select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector’s Extended menu. Extended > A/V Settings > A/V Output

What is the function of the Remote port (Stereo pin mini jack)?

Connects the remote control to the projector using the optional remote control cable set and inputs signals from the remote control. When the remote control is connected, the remote receiver on the projector is disabled.

What is the function of the Cable holder?

Pass a commercially available cable tie through here to secure the cables.

What is the warning for the Cable holder?

Do not bundle the power cord to the other cables. Otherwise, a fire may occur.

What is the function of the RS-232C port (Mini D-Sub 9-pin, male)?

Use to connect an RS-232C cable to control the projector from a computer

What is the function of the Service port (USB connector Type B)?

Used for batch settings and firmware update.

What is the function of the USB-A port (USB connection Type A)?

Use to connect a USB memory device for projecting movies or images in Content Playback mode. It is also used for batch settings and firmware update. Use to connect the optional camera when using the optional ultra short-throw zoom lens. Provides a connection for a streaming media player to power it. This projector can be powered at 5 V/2 A or 5 V/ 900mA.

What are the cautions for the USB-A port (USB connection Type A)?

Use the USB cable supplied with or specified for use with the device.
Do not connect a USB hub or a USB cable longer than three meters, or the device may not operate correctly.

What is the function of the LAN port (RJ-45)?

Use to connect a LAN cable to connect to a network. Use a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a Category 5 shielded cable or better.

How do you connect a LAN cable to the optional HDBaseT Transmitter?

Use the HDBaseT port (RJ-45). You can use a network cable up to 330 ft (100 m) in length. To ensure proper data transmission, use a Category 5e STP cable or better. However, operation is not guaranteed for all input/output devices and environments. This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.

How do you enable communication from the Ethernet and serial ports on the transmitter?

Select On as the Control Communications setting in the projector’s Extended menu. Extended > HDBaseT > Control Communications

If you have connected an Extron XTP transmitter or switcher, what setting should you select?

Select On as the Extron XTP setting in the projector’s Extended menu. Extended > HDBaseT > Extron XTP

What does the SDI In port (BNC) do?

(EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W only) Inputs video signals from SDI-compatible video equipment.

What does the SDI Out port (BNC) do?

(EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W only) Outputs video signals input from the SDI In port to an external monitor. You can connect two projectors in a daisy chain using an SDI cable.

If you want to output images to an external monitor when the projector is turned off, what should you do?

Select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector’s Extended menu. Extended > A/V Settings > A/V Output

When using 12G-SDI, what type of cable should you use?

Use a cable that supports 12G-SDI. Make sure the cable you are using is as short as possible. Images may not display correctly when using a long cable.

What does the HDMI2 port do?

Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video equipment and computers. Connects the optional base unit of the Epson Wireless Presentation System. This port is compatible with HDCP2.3. (Audio is only supported by PCM).

What does the HDMI1 In port (HDMI) do?

What does the HDMI1 Out port (HDMI) do?

Outputs signals to an external monitor or another projector. Connecting an HDMI cable from this port to the HDMI1 In port of another projector lets you create and project a single unified image. We recommend connecting to a projector of the same model. This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.

When sending 4K60 4:4:4 18 Gbps images, what type of cable should you use?

Use a premium HDMI cable. If you use an incompatible cable, images may not be displayed correctly.

If images are not displayed at 18 Gbps, how can you display them?

You may be able to display them by lowering the Resolution setting in EDID from the Signal menu. * Signal > Advanced > EDID

What do the Front adjustable feet do?

When the projector is set up on a surface such as a desk, turn to extend the foot to adjust the position of the image. You can adjust the position of the image by tilting the projector up to 10°. The larger the angle of tilt, the harder it becomes to focus. When you install the optional air filter on your projector, your adjustments may be limited due to interference from other parts.

What are the Safety wire screw holes used for?

Screw hole for securing the ring of the safety wire to prevent the projector from falling from the ceiling or wall.

What do the Rear adjustable feet do?

When the projector is set up on a surface such as a desk, turn to extend and retract the feet to adjust the horizontal tilt. You can adjust the tilt within a range of ±1.5°. The rear feet are detachable. You can extend the feet by approximately 0.47 in (12 mm) before they detach.

What is the Security cable attachment point?

Pass the theft-prevention wire lock through here and lock it in place. Warning: Do not attach the safety wire to this point.

What are the Cable cover screw holes?

The screw holes for securing the cable cover. Make sure the cables have been passed through the notch on the base of the cable cover before attaching the cable cover.

What are the Air filter cover screws used for?

Screws to fix the air filter cover in place.

What is the Cable holder used for?

Pass the cable of the optional external camera through here to secure the cable.

What are the Optional external camera attachment points?

Use these points to attach the optional external camera.

What are the Ceiling mount attachment points used for?

Use these points to attach the optional ceiling mount when installing the projector on a wall, or mounting the projector from a ceiling. When you use the optional ceiling mount, you can install the safety wire to prevent the projector from falling from the ceiling. Secure the carabiner using the M6 × 15 mm bolt supplied with the safety wire set, and loop the safety wire through the ceiling mount to secure it as shown.

What does the On button do?

Turns the projector on.

What does the Source Search button do?

Changes to the next input source.

What does the Menu button do?

Displays and closes the projector’s menu.

What does the Enter button do?

Enters the current selection and moves to the next level while displaying the projector’s menu.

What does the Left arrow button do?

Displays the Control Panel Lock screen allowing you to lock the control panel buttons.

How do you unlock the control panel buttons?

Set the Control Panel Lock setting to Off.
Hold down the Enter button on the control panel for more than seven seconds.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector’s menu.

What does the Down arrow button do?

Displays a test pattern. The test pattern’s shape is determined by the Screen Type setting. Be sure to set the correct screen type before adjusting with the test pattern.

Extended > Display > Screen > Screen Type.
Selects menu items while displaying the projector’s menu.

What does the Shutter button do?

Turns the video and audio on or off temporarily. The projector’s power automatically turns off two hours after A/V Mute is enabled. You can disable this feature.

Extended > Operation > A/V Mute Settings > A/V Mute Timer

What does the Lens button do?

Displays the adjustment screens for lens shift, zoom, focus, and distortion in that order each time the button is pressed. Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy. When adjusting the image position using vertical lens shift, adjust it by moving the image from the bottom to the top. If you adjust it from the top to the bottom, the image position may move down slightly after adjusting. Hold down the button for more than three seconds to move the lens position to the home position. Keep the lens position in the home position for the clearest picture.

What does the Right arrow button do?

Displays the projector’s Info menu. Selects menu items while displaying the projector’s menu.

What does the Up arrow button do?

Corrects the shape of the image using the options in the Geometry Correction setting. Selects menu items while displaying the projector’s menu.

What does the Esc button do?

Stops the current function. Moves back to the previous menu level while displaying the projector’s menu.

What does the Standby button do?

Turns the projector off.

What do the Source buttons do?

Switch the image source to each port. The Port A and Port B buttons are not available.

What does the Uniformity button do?

Displays the Color Uniformity screen where you can adjust the color tone balance of the projected image.

What does the i information button do?

Displays the projector’s Info menu.

What does the Memory button do?

Displays the Memory screen where you can save customized settings and load saved settings. A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a blue mark. Saving over a previously saved memory overwrites the settings with your current settings.

What does the On-Screen button do?

Turns the On-Screen Display function on and off.

What does the Blend Guide button do?

Turns on/off the Line Guide and Pattern Guide from the Edge Blending menu.

What does the Test Pattern button do?

Displays a test pattern. The test pattern’s shape is determined by the Screen Type setting. Be sure to set the correct screen type before adjusting with the test pattern.

Extended > Display > Screen > Screen Type

What does the Menu button on the remote control do?

Displays and closes the projector’s menu. Hold down this button for more than 15 seconds to turn on all remote control receivers.

What does the Shutter button on the remote control do?

Turns the video and audio on or off temporarily. The projector’s power automatically turns off two hours after A/V Mute is enabled. You can disable this feature.

Extended > Operation > A/V Mute Settings > A/V Mute Timer.

Hold down this button for more than five seconds to flip the image over top-to-bottom.

What do the Focus +/- buttons do?

Adjusts the focus in the projected image.

What do the Zoom +/- buttons do?

Adjusts the image size.

What does the Lens Shift button do?

Adjusts the position of the projected image. Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy. When adjusting the image position using vertical lens shift, adjust it by moving the image from the bottom to the top. If you adjust it from the top to the bottom, the image position may move down slightly after adjusting. Hold down this button for more than three seconds to move the lens position to the home position. Keep the lens position in the home position for the clearest picture.

What does the Si Stack button do?

Displays the simple stacking menu.

What does the Sc Match button do?

Displays the screen matching menu.

What do the Numeric buttons do?

Enters numbers in the projector’s menu while holding down the Num button. In Content Playback mode, enter numbers while holding down the Num button to play back your favorite playlists.

What do the User buttons do?

Perform settings assigned in the User Button setting in the projector’s Settings menu.

What does the ID button do?

Press this button and press a number button within 5 seconds to select the ID for the projector you want to operate using the remote control. (Enter a one-digit or two-digit number.) If you do not know the projector’s ID, press this button during projection to temporarily display the projector’s ID and the remote control’s ID on the screen.

What does the ID switch do?

Enables (On) or disables (Off) ID settings for the remote control.

What does the Split button do?

This button is not used.

What does the Remote port do?

How do you display and close the Home screen?

Press the 23 button to display and close the Home screen.

How do you lock or unlock the remote control buttons?

Hold down the 23 button for more than five seconds to lock or unlock the remote control buttons.

How do you enter numbers using the numeric buttons on the remote?

Hold down the 24 Num button to enter numbers using the numeric buttons.

How do you adjust the volume of the Audio Out port?

Press the 25 Volume button.

How do you display the color calibration menu?

Press the 26 Color Cal button.

How do you display the previous or next test pattern while displaying a test pattern?

Press the 27 Test Pattern +/- buttons to display the previous or next test pattern while displaying a test pattern.

How do you control page up and down on your computer when you connect a projector and computer over the network?

Press the 27 Test Pattern +/- buttons to control page up and down on your computer when you connect a projector and computer over the network.

How do you display the simple blending menu?

Press the 28 Si Blend button.

How do you adjust the lens calibration?

Press the 29 Calibration button.

How do you correct keystone distortion of the projected image?

Press the 30 Geometry button to display the Geometry Correction screen allowing you to correct keystone distortion of the projected image.

How do you adjust the distortion in the projected image?

Press the 31 Distortion +/- buttons.

How do you return the selected setting to its default value?

Press the 32 Default button to return the selected setting to its default value.

How do you start the lens calibration process?

Hold down the 32 Default button for more than three seconds to start the lens calibration process.

How do you enter the current selection and move to the next level while displaying the projector’s menu?

Press the 33 Enter button.

How do you select menu items while displaying the projector’s menu?

Press the 34 Arrow buttons.

How do you stop the current function or move back to the previous menu level while displaying the projector’s menu?

Press the 35 Esc button to stop the current function.

How do you display the projector’s Multi-Projection menu?

Press the 36 Multi button.

How do you change the color mode?

Press the 37 Color Mode button.

How do you pause or resume images?

Press the 38 Freeze button to pauses or resumes images.

How do you set up password security?

Hold down the 38 Freeze button for more than 5 seconds to set up password security.

How do you switch to the next input source?

Press the 39 Search button.

How do you illuminate the buttons on the remote control?

Press the 40 Illumination button to illuminate the buttons on the remote control for approximately 15 seconds.

What does the 41 Indicator light do?

The indicator light lights up when the remote is sending signals.

What does the 42 Remote control signal emitter do?

The remote control signal emitter outputs remote control signals.

How do you set up your projector for use?

Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use:

Projector Placement
Attaching and Removing a Lens
Attaching and Removing the Cable Cover
Installing the Safety Wire
Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

Where can you place the projector?

You can place the projector on almost any flat surface to project an image.

Where else can you install the projector?

You can also install the projector in a ceiling mount if you want to use it in a fixed location.

What type of screws should you use when installing the projector with a ceiling mount?

When using a ceiling mount, use commercially available M6 screws (up to a depth of 0.55 inches [14 mm]) to attach the mount to the projector.

Are there any vertical or horizontal limits to how the projector can be installed?

There is no vertical or horizontal limit to how the projector can be installed.

What considerations should you keep in mind as you select a projector location?

Place the projector on a sturdy, level surface or install it using a compatible mount.
Place the projector parallel to the screen.
Leave plenty of space around and under the projector for ventilation, and do not place it on top of or next to anything that could block the vents.
Position the projector within reach of a grounded electrical outlet or extension cord.
Make sure you read the safety instructions when placing or mounting your projector.

Why should you leave plenty of space around and under the projector?

If there is not enough space around the projector and the internal temperature of the projector increases, the brightness of the light source may decrease.

What else should you make sure of when considering the projector location?

Make sure hot air from the exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent.

Where can I find more information on safety instructions?

See the link below.

Projector Setup and Installation Options
Projection Distance

What are the different ways you can set up or install your projector?

You can set up or install your projector in the following ways:

Front
Rear
Front ceiling
Rear ceiling

How much space should you leave around the projector to avoid blocking the air exhaust and intake vents?

Be sure to leave the following amount of space around the projector to avoid blocking the air exhaust and intake vents:

11.8 inches (30 cm)
7.9 inches (20 cm)
3.9 inches (10 cm)

Why is it important to leave space around the projector?

Do not install the projector in a location that does not allow air to circulate, such as on a shelf or in a box.

What could happen if there is not enough space around the projector?

If there is not enough space around the projector and the internal temperature of the projector increases, the brightness of the light source may decrease.

What should you make sure of regarding the exhaust and intake vents?

Make sure hot air from the exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent.

How much space should be left between projectors if you are installing multiple projectors next to each other?

If you are installing multiple projectors next to each other, be sure to leave at least 28 inches (70 cm) of space between the projectors.

What should you avoid doing when installing multiple projectors?

Also, make sure heated air from an exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent of another projector.

How much space should you leave if there is a partition?

With a partition:

12 inches (30 cm)

How much installation space is needed with the optional air filter installed?

If you are installing the optional air filter to your projector, be sure to leave the following amount of space around the projector to avoid blocking the air exhaust and intake vents:

11.8 inches (30 cm)
7.9 inches (20 cm)
3.9 inches (10 cm)
29.5 inches (75 cm)

What could happen if there is not enough space around the projector when the optional air filter is installed?

If there is not enough space around the projector and the internal temperature of the projector increases, the brightness of the light source may decrease.

What should you make sure of when installing the projector with the optional air filter installed?

Make sure hot air from the exhaust vent does not go into the air intake vent.

What does the camera lens on the optional external camera do?

The camera lens takes photos.

Where should you not use or store the external camera?

Do not use or store the external camera in places where it will be exposed to strong light.

Why should you not use or store the external camera in places where it will be exposed to strong light?

Otherwise, burning or malfunction may occur.

What does the indicator light on the external camera indicate?

The indicator light indicates the external camera’s status.

What does it mean when the external camera indicator light is lit?

Lit: standby

What does it mean when the external camera indicator light is flashing at 0.25-second intervals?

Flashing (0.25-second intervals): external camera is malfunctioning

What does it mean when the external camera indicator light is flashing at 0.5-second intervals?

Flashing (0.5-second intervals): external camera is operating

What does it mean when the external camera indicator light is flashing at 1-second intervals?

Flashing (1 second intervals): updating the firmware

What does the Micro-USB-B port on the external camera do?

The Micro-USB-B port connects the supplied USB cable to the projector.

What is the screw hole on the external camera used for?

The screw hole secures the mount for installing the external camera.

Can the settings listed below be changed when using a still image as a test pattern, even when the image is frozen using the freeze function?

Yes. When using a still image as a test pattern, you can change the following settings even when the image is frozen using the freeze function:

Geometry Correction
Focus, Zoom, Lens Shift, Distortion
Setting Color Mode
White Balance

How do you attach a compatible lens to the projector?

You can attach a compatible lens to the projector.

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Pull the lens cover off of the projector.
If necessary, remove the lens socket cap from the lens socket.
Remove the stopper, if necessary.
Pinch the lock lever and move it to the Release position.
Insert the lens straight into the projector’s lens socket with the white dot facing up.
Hold the lens firmly after it is fully inserted, then pinch the lock lever and move it to the Lock position.
Reattach the stopper.
Replace the lens cover.
To perform lens calibration, turn on the projector.
If prompted, select Yes to calibrate the lens.

Note: For information on installing an ultra short-throw zoom lens, see the User’s Guide supplied with the lens. To avoid injury, be careful not to get your fingers caught between the projector and lens. Do not touch the glass surface of the lens. Make sure the lens is securely attached. If the lens is not secured, it may fall off and could cause an injury when moving the projector. The lever is secured even without using the lever lock, but the lock adds an additional measure of safety. If projecting down, we recommend securing the lens cover with commercially available screws (M3×12mm).

What does lens calibration do?

Lens calibration helps the projector to correctly acquire the lens position and adjustment range, and can take up to 100 seconds to complete. When calibration is finished, the lens returns to the same position it was in before calibration (The ELPLX02, ELPLX02S, ELPLX02W, and ELPLX02WS lenses return to the standard position).

Note: If no message appears after attaching the lens, perform lens calibration by holding down the Default button on the remote control for approximately 3 seconds, or you can go to Extended > Operation > Lens Calibration in the projector menu.

What may happen if you do not calibrate the lens?

If you do not calibrate the lens, the following functions may not operate correctly:

Focus
Distortion
Zoom
Lens Shift
Memory (Lens Position)

Note: If the icon indicating that lens calibration has failed is displayed, remove the lens and then reinstall it. If the message continues to be displayed, stop using the projector, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet, and contact Epson for help.

How do you remove a lens to replace it with a different lens?

You can remove a lens to replace it with a different lens.

Press and hold the Lens Shift (remote control) or Lens (control panel) button for approximately 3 seconds to move the lens to the center position.
Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Pull the lens cover off of the projector.
Remove the stopper, if necessary.
Hold the lens firmly as you pinch the lock lever and move it to the Release position. Then, gently pull the lens straight out of the projector.

Warning: Wait at least 30 minutes to remove or replace the lens after turning off the projector. Touching the lens unit before it cools down may cause burns. Remove the lens only when necessary and make sure the front of the projector is not facing up when you remove the lens. This prevents dirt or dust from entering the projector and lowering the projection quality. Avoid touching the lens with your bare hands to prevent fingerprints on or damage to the lens surface.

How do you attach the cable cover that came with your projector to hide the attached cables from view?

You can attach the cable cover that came with your projector to hide the attached cables from view.

Bundle the cables together using a band or other fastener (not provided).
Place the cable cover on the projector as shown, guiding the cables through the notch on the base of the cable cover.
Tighten both cable cover screws.

Caution: Do not bundle the power cord to the other cables. Otherwise, a fire may occur.

What determines the approximate size of the image?

The distance at which you place the projector from the screen determines the approximate size of the image. The image size increases the farther the projector is from the screen, but can vary depending on the zoom factor, aspect ratio, and other settings.

How can you mount the projector?

You can mount the projector to the ceiling at any horizontal or vertical angle.

How do I install the safety wire?

Secure the ring of the safety wire using the M6 × 15 mm bolt included with the safety wire set.
Loop the safety wire through the ceiling mount to secure it.

How do I install the batteries in the remote control?

Remove the battery cover.
Remove the old batteries, if necessary.
Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

How do I use the projector on a wired network?

You can project through a wired network. To do this, you connect the projector to your network with an Ethernet cable, and then set up your projector and computer for network projection. You can use Epson iProjection to project static images and presentations over a wired network. After connecting and setting up the projector, install the projector software. You may need to install it from a software CD, if included, or download the software and manuals as necessary.

How do I connect to a wired network?

To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a Category 5e shielded cable or higher.

Connect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or router.
Connect the other end of the cable to the projector’s LAN port.

How do I select wired network settings?

Before you can project from computers, tablets, or smartphones over your network, you must select the network settings for the projector using its menu system. Make sure you already connected the projector to your wired network using the LAN port.

Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Basic menu and press Enter.
Select the following basic options as necessary:
- Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the projector over the network.
- PJLink Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for using the PJLink protocol for projector control.
- Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for accessing the Remote screen in Epson Web Control. (Default user name is EPSONREMOTE; no default password is set.)
- Web Control Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for accessing Epson Web Control. (Default user name is EPSONWEB; no default password is set.)
- Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. The projector displays a random keyword that you must enter from a computer using the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or an iOS or Android device, or on a Chromebook, using the Epson iProjection app.
- Display Keyword lets you display a keyword on the projected image when accessing the projector from a computer using the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or an iOS or Android device, or on a Chromebook, using the Epson iProjection app.
- Display LAN Info lets you select how the projector displays network information. You can select an option to display a QR code that lets you quickly connect your iOS or Android devices using the Epson iProjection app.
Select the Wired LAN menu and press Enter.
Select your IP Settings as necessary:
- If your network assigns addresses automatically, turn on the DHCP setting.
- If you must set addresses manually, turn off DHCP and enter the projector’s IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as needed.
To prevent display of the IP address on the standby screen, turn off IP Address Display.
To connect the projector to the network using IPv6, select On as the IPv6 Settings option. Then select the Auto Configuration and Use Temporary Address settings as necessary.
When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

How do I use the projector on a wireless network?

You can project over a wireless network. To do this, you must set up your projector and computer for wireless projection. There are two ways to connect to your projector wirelessly:

Creating a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key (Windows only) using the Epson iProjection software
Configuring the connection manually using the projector’s Network menus

After connecting and setting up the projector, install the projector software as necessary. You may need to install it from a software CD, if included, or download the software and manuals as necessary. You can use Epson iProjection to project static images and presentations over a wireless network.

How do I install the wireless LAN module?

To use the projector over a wireless network, install the optional Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module. Do not install any other type of wireless LAN module.

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Loosen the screws and remove the air filter cover as shown (it is attached with a tether).
Insert the wireless LAN module into the port.
Replace the air filter cover as shown and tighten the screws.
Plug in and turn on the projector.

Setting Up the Projector

Installing the Safety Wire

Q: How do I install the safety wire?

A: When you use the optional ceiling mount, you can install the safety wire (not included) to prevent the projector from falling from the mount.

Secure the ring of the safety wire using the M6 × 15 mm bolt included with the safety wire set.
Loop the safety wire through the ceiling mount to secure it.

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control

Q: How do I install batteries in the remote control?

A: The remote control uses the two AA batteries that came with the projector.

Caution: Use only the type of batteries specified in this manual. Do not install batteries of different types, or mix new and old batteries.

Remove the battery cover.
Remove the old batteries, if necessary.
Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.

Warning: Make sure the batteries are inserted in the correct positions. If the batteries are not inserted correctly, they could explode or leak, causing a fire, injury, or damage to the product.

Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

Warning: Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very dangerous if swallowed.

Using the Projector on a Network

Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.

Note: Epson iProjection is not recommended for use with streaming video.

Wired Network Projection
Wireless Network Projection
Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts

Wired Network Projection

Q: How do I use the projector on a wired network?

A: You can project through a wired network. To do this, you connect the projector to your network with an Ethernet cable, and then set up your projector and computer for network projection. You can use Epson iProjection to project static images and presentations over a wired network.

Note: Epson iProjection is not recommended for use with streaming video.

After connecting and setting up the projector, install the projector software. You may need to install it from a software CD, if included, or download the software and manuals as necessary.

Connecting to a Wired Network
Selecting Wired Network Settings

Related references

Additional Projector Software and Manuals

Connecting to a Wired Network

Q: How do I connect to a wired network?

A: To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-TX or 10Base-T network cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a Category 5e shielded cable or higher.

Connect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or router.
Connect the other end of the cable to the projector’s LAN port.

Selecting Wired Network Settings

Q: How do I select wired network settings?

A: Before you can project from computers, tablets, or smartphones over your network, you must select the network settings for the projector using its menu system.

Note: Make sure you already connected the projector to your wired network using the LAN port.

Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Basic menu and press Enter.
Select the following basic options as necessary:
- Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the projector over the network.
- PJLink Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for using the PJLink protocol for projector control.
- Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for accessing the Remote screen in Epson Web Control. (Default user name is EPSONREMOTE; no default password is set.)
- Web Control Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for accessing Epson Web Control. (Default user name is EPSONWEB; no default password is set.)
- Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. The projector displays a random keyword that you must enter from a computer using the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or an iOS or Android device, or on a Chromebook, using the Epson iProjection app.
- Display Keyword lets you display a keyword on the projected image when accessing the projector from a computer using the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or an iOS or Android device, or on a Chromebook, using the Epson iProjection app.
- Display LAN Info lets you select how the projector displays network information. You can select an option to display a QR code that lets you quickly connect your iOS or Android devices using the Epson iProjection app.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the name, passwords, and keyword. Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.

Select the Wired LAN menu and press Enter.
Select your IP Settings as necessary:
- If your network assigns addresses automatically, turn on the DHCP setting.
- If you must set addresses manually, turn off DHCP and enter the projector’s IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as needed.

Note: To highlight the numbers you want from the displayed keyboard, press the arrow buttons on the remote control. To select a highlighted number, press Enter.

To prevent display of the IP address on the standby screen, turn off IP Address Display.
To connect the projector to the network using IPv6, select On as the IPv6 Settings option. Then select the Auto Configuration and Use Temporary Address settings as necessary.
When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

Related references

Projector Name
PJLink Password
Remote Password
Web Control Password
Monitor Password
Moderator Password
Display Keyword
Projector Keyword
Display LAN Info

Wireless Network Projection

Q: How do I use the projector on a wireless network?

A: You can project over a wireless network. To do this, you must set up your projector and computer for wireless projection.

Note: The Epson 802.11b/g/n/a wireless LAN module is not included with your projector and is optional.

There are two ways to connect to your projector wirelessly:

Creating a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key (Windows only) using the Epson iProjection software
Configuring the connection manually using the projector’s Network menus

Note: Epson iProjection is not recommended for use with streaming video.

Installing the Wireless LAN Module
Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device
Using Quick Wireless Connection (Windows)
Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually
Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows
Selecting Wireless Network Settings on Mac
Setting Up Wireless Network Security

Related references

Additional Projector Software and Manuals
Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

Installing the Wireless LAN Module

Q: How do I install the wireless LAN module?

A: To use the projector over a wireless network, install the optional Epson 802.11b/g/n wireless LAN module. Do not install any other type of wireless LAN module.

Caution: Never remove the module while its indicator light is on or flashing, or while you are projecting wirelessly. You may damage the module or lose data.

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Loosen the screws and remove the air filter cover as shown (it is attached with a tether).
Insert the wireless LAN module into the port.
Replace the air filter cover as shown and tighten the screws.
Plug in and turn on the projector.

Related references

Optional Equipment and Replacement Parts

How do you connect a mobile device using a QR Code?

After you select the wireless network settings for your projector, you can display a QR code on the screen and use it to connect a mobile device using the Epson iProjection app. Make sure you have installed the latest version of Epson iProjection on your device.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Basic menu and press Enter.
Set the Display LAN Info setting to Text & QR Code.
Select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
Do one of the following:
- Press the LAN button on the remote control.
- Select Display the QR Code in the projector’s Network menu.
- Press the Home button on the remote control and select Display the QR Code on the Home screen.
Start Epson iProjection on your mobile device.
Use the QR code reader feature to read the QR code and connect your device to the projector.

Note: If you do not see the QR code after pressing the LAN button, press Enter to display it.

How do you use Quick Wireless Connection (Windows)?

You can create a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key to quickly connect the projector to a Windows computer wirelessly. Then you can project your presentation and remove the key when you are done.

Note: A USB flash drive is not included with your projector.

Create a Quick Wireless Connection USB Key with a USB flash drive and the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software. Note: See the online Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for instructions.
Turn on the projector.
Press the LAN button on the remote control. You see the LAN standby screen.
Verify that an SSID and IP address are displayed.
Remove the wireless LAN module from the projector.
Insert the USB key into the same port used for the wireless LAN module. You see a projected message that the network information update is complete.
Remove the USB key.
Reinsert the wireless LAN module into the projector.
Insert the USB key into a USB port on your computer. Note: In Windows Vista, if you see the AutoPlay window, select Run MPPLaunch.exe, then select Allow on the next screen.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software. Note: If you see a Windows Firewall message, click Yes to disable the firewall. You need administrator authority to install the software. If it is not installed automatically, double-click MPPLaunch.exe in the USB key. After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the projector. If it does not appear, press the LAN or Source Search button on your remote control or restart your computer.
Run your presentation as necessary.
When you finish projecting wirelessly, select the Safely Remove Hardware option in the Windows taskbar, then remove the USB key from your computer.

Note: You can share the USB key with other computers without disconnecting your computer. You may need to restart your computer to reactivate your wireless LAN connection.

How do you select wireless network settings manually?

Before you can project from your wireless network, you must select the network settings for the projector using its menu system.

Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Set the Wireless Mode setting to Wireless LAN On and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Basic menu and press Enter.
Select the following basic options as necessary:

Projector Name lets you enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long to identify the projector over the network.
PJLink Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for using the PJLink protocol for projector control.
Remote Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for accessing the projector using Basic Control. (Default user name is EPSONREMOTE; no default password is set.)
Web Control Password lets you enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long for accessing the projector over the web. (Default user name is EPSONWEB; no default password is set.)
Moderator Password lets you enter a password up to 4 numbers long for accessing the projector as a moderator with the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or the Epson iProjection app.
Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. The projector displays a random keyword that you must enter from a computer using the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or an iOS or Android device, or on a Chromebook, using the Epson iProjection app.
Display Keyword lets you display a keyword on the projected image when accessing the projector from a computer using the Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software or an iOS or Android device, or on a Chromebook, using the Epson iProjection app.
Display LAN Info lets you select how the projector displays network information. You can select an option to display a QR code that lets you quickly connect your iOS or Android devices with the Epson iProjection app.

Note: Use the displayed keyboard to enter the name, passwords and keyword. Press the arrow buttons on the remote control to highlight characters and press Enter to select them.

Select the Wireless LAN menu and press Enter.
Select the settings on the Wireless LAN menu as necessary for your network.
When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus. After you complete the wireless settings for your projector, you need to select the wireless network on your computer, Chromebook, or iOS or Android device.

What are the Wireless LAN Menu Settings?

Setting	Options	Description
Connection Mode	Quick	Selects the type of wireless connection: Quick: lets you connect to multiple smartphones, tablets, or computers directly Advanced: lets you connect to multiple smartphones, tablets, or computers via a wireless network access point
	Advanced
Search Access Point	To Search	Search for available wireless network access points in Advanced connection mode
	View
SSID	Up 32 alphanumeric characters	Sets the SSID (network name) of the wireless LAN system the projector is connecting to
Security	Open	Selects the type of wireless security used in the wireless network (some options are only available when the Connection Mode setting is set to Advanced)
	WPA2-PSK
	WPA3-PSK
	WPA2/WPA3-PSK
	WPA3-EAP
	WPA2/WPA3-EAP
Passphrase	Between 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters	Enter a paraphrase for the wireless network
EAP Method	EAP Type	Sets the EAP settings for WPA2-EAP and WPA/WPA2-EAP security
	User name
	Password
	Client Certificate
	Verify Server Cert.
	CA certificate
	RADIUS Serv.Name
Channel	1ch	In Quick connection mode, selects the frequency band (channel) used by the wireless LAN
	6ch
	11ch
IP Settings	DHCP	Turns on DHCP if your network assigns addresses automatically; set to Off to manually enter the network’s IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address (some options are only available when the Connection Mode setting is set to Advanced)
	IP Address
	Subnet Mask
	Gateway Address
	DNS Server 1
	DNS Server 2
SSID Display	On	Selects whether to display the SSID on the network standby screen
	Off
IP Address Display	On	Selects whether to display the IP address on the network standby screen
	Off
IPv6 Settings	IPv6 Auto Configuration	Selects the IPv6 settings when you connect the projector to the network using IPv6 The Epson Web Control and PJLink functions support IPv6.
	Use Temporary Address

How do you select wireless network settings in Windows?

Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your computer.

To access your wireless utility software, access the Desktop and double-click the network icon on the Windows taskbar.
Do one of the following:
- If your projector is set up on an existing network (Advanced mode), select the network name (SSID).
- If your projector is configured for Quick mode, select the projector’s SSID.
Click Connect.

How do you select Wireless Network Settings on Mac?

Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your Mac.

Click the AirPort or Wi-Fi icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.
Make sure AirPort or Wi-Fi is turned on, then do one of the following:
- If your projector is set up on an existing network (Advanced mode), select the network name (SSID).
- If your projector is configured for Quick mode, select the projector’s SSID.

How do you set up wireless network security?

You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network. Set up one of the following security options to match the settings used on your network:

WPA2-PSK (Quick connection mode)
WPA3-PSK (Advanced connection mode)
WPA3-EAP (Advanced connection mode)
WPA2/WPA3-PSK (Advanced connection mode)
WPA2/WPA3-EAP (Advanced connection mode)

Note: Contact your network administrator for guidance on entering the correct information.

If you want to set up WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP security, make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration and placed directly on the USB storage device.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Wireless LAN menu and press Enter.
Set the Security setting to match your network settings.

How do you select the EAP Type setting on a Epson EB-PQ2008B projector?

Select your authentication protocol as the EAP Type setting.

How do you import a certificate for EAP on a Epson EB-PQ2008B projector?

To import your certification, select the certificate type (either Client Certificate or CA certificate) and press Enter.

How do you register a digital certificate on a Epson EB-PQ2008B projector?

Select Register and press Enter. Follow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to the projector’s USB-A port. Press Enter to display the certificate list. Select the certificate to import from the displayed list. You will see a message to enter the certificate password. Enter a password and press Enter. You will see a completion message after the certificate is imported.

How do you enter a user name longer than 32 characters for EAP settings?

Use your web browser.

How do you enter a password longer than 32 characters for PEAP, EAP-FAST, or LEAP protocols?

Use your web browser.

What does the Verify Server Cert. setting do?

It lets you select whether or not to verify the server certificate when a CA certificate has been set.

What does the RADIUS Serv.Name setting do?

It lets you enter the server name to be verified.

How do you save settings and exit the menus?

When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

How do you set up projector network e-mail alerts on a Epson EB-PQ2008B projector?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Notifications menu and press Enter.
Turn on Mail Notification.
Enter the IP address for the SMTP Server setting.
Select a number for the SMTP server Port Number setting, from 1 to 65535 (default is 25).
Enter the sender’s email address as the From setting.
Choose an Address Setting field, enter the e-mail address, and select or deselect the alerts you want to receive there. Your e-mail address can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. Repeat for up to three addresses.
If you are using the PJLink protocol for projector control, turn on the PJLink Notification setting and enter the IP address where you want to receive PJLink notifications as the Notified IP Address setting.
When you finish selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.

What IP addresses should not be used for the SMTP Server setting?

Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255).

How many characters can you enter for an email address in the Address Setting field?

Your e-mail address can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.

How do you enter more than 32 characters for the email address?

If you use Web Config.

Will you receive an e-mail alert if a critical problem causes a projector to shut down?

You may not receive an e-mail alert.

What information does a network projector e-mail alert contain?

When a problem occurs with a networked projector, and you selected to receive e-mail alerts, you receive an e-mail containing the following information:

Epson Projector on the subject line
The name of the projector experiencing a problem
The IP address of the affected projector
Detailed information about the problem

How do you select optional network settings on the Others menu on a Epson EB-PQ2008B projector?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and press Enter.
Select the Others menu and press Enter.

How do you select the authentication method for command communication?

Select Command Communication. Select Protected to perform Digest Authentication using the Web Control Password setting. Select Compatible to perform plain text authentication using the Monitor Password.

How do you use the Secure HTTP protocol to encrypt communication when using Web Control?

Turn on the Secure HTTP setting and import the web server certificate using the Web Server Cert. setting.

How do you operate the projector using Web API?

Turn on the Web API setting. The username for API authentication is EPSONWEB; use the password that is set for the Web Control Password.

How do you select the Priority Gateway setting?

Select the Priority Gateway setting for your network.

How do you allow the projector to be detected by an AMX controller?

Turn on the AMX Device Discovery setting.

How do you allow the projector to be detected by a Crestron Connected controller?

Turn on the Crestron Connected setting.

What happens when you enable Crestron Connected?

It disables the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software (Windows only).

How do you allow the projector to be used with Crestron Xio Cloud?

Turn on the Crestron Xio Cloud setting.

How do you control the projector using Art-Net?

Turn on the Art-Net setting. Art-Net is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol. You can control the projector by using a DMX controller or an application system.

How do you control the projector using sACN?

Turn on the sACN setting and make the necessary settings. sACN is an Ethernet communication protocol based on the TCP/IP protocol. You can control the projector by using a DMX controller or an application system. sACN communicates using the multicast method.

How do you enable the projector to receive broadcast messages over the network?

Turn on the Message Broadcasting setting. Administrators can broadcast messages over the network using the Epson Projector Management software (Windows only).

What does Epson Projector Management Connected and Epson Projector Management software allow you to do?

Epson Projector Management Connected and Epson Projector Management software (Windows only) lets you monitor and control your projector over a network. With Epson Projector Management Connected, projector information is managed on a cloud server, so it can be remotely monitored and controlled from any device. Epson Projector Management is a Windows-only software that allows you to monitor and control projectors within the same network from your computer.

What are the differences between Epson Projector Management Connected and Epson Projector Management software?

Choose one of the software programs mentioned above depending on your usage environment and purpose. For additional information, visit the Epson support website.

What does Epson Web Control allow you to do?

Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can select projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web browser. This lets you access the projector remotely. See the link below for more information. In Content Playback mode, you can also edit playlists.

What web browsers can be used with Epson Web Control?

Microsoft Edge (Windows)
Safari (Mac, iOS)
Chrome (Android)

What are some important things to note when using Epson Web Control?

While using the Web browser, do not connect using a proxy server. You cannot select all of the projector menu settings or control all projector functions using a Web browser. If you set Standby Mode to Communication On, you can use a Web browser to select settings and control projection even if the projector is in standby mode.

How can network administrators monitor projectors?

Network administrators can install SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) software on network computers so they can monitor projectors. If your network uses this software, you can set up the projector for SNMP monitoring.

What version of SNMP does this projector support?

SNMP agent version 1 (SNMPv1).

How do you control the projector from an external device?

You can control the projector from an external device using ESC/VP21. When the power ON command is transmitted to the projector, the power turns on and it enters warm-up mode. When the projector’s power has turned on, a colon “:” (3Ah) is returned. When a command is input, the projector executes the command and returns a “:”, and then accepts the next command. If the command being processed terminates abnormally, an error message is output and a “:” is returned.

Can you execute ESC/VP21 commands by Web API?

You can also execute some of the ESC/VP21 commands by Web API. For additional information, visit the Epson website and search for your product’s support page.

How do you monitor the projector using ESC/VP.net commands?

You can monitor the projector using ESC/VP.net commands. When the Command Communication setting is set to Protected, you can connect to the projector using version 2.0 and the Web Control Password. When the Command Communication setting is set to Compatible, you can connect to the projector using version 2.0 or 1.0. Use the Monitor Password to access version 1.0. You must set the Web Control Password or Monitor Password before using the ESC/VP.net Commands. For additional information, visit the Epson website and search for your product’s support page.

What is PJLink?

PJLink was established by the JBMIA (Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association) as a standard protocol for controlling network compatible projectors as part of their efforts to standardize projector control protocols. The projector complies with the PJLink Class2 standard established by the JBMIA. The port number used for the PJLink search function is 4352 (UDP). You need to make network settings before you can use PJLink. The projector complies with all commands except for the following commands defined by PJLink Class2, and confirmed by the PJLink standard adaptability verification.

What are the non-compatible PJLink commands?

Auto muting set – AVMT 21
Image muting set – AVMT 11

How do you control a networked projector using a web browser?

Make sure the projector is turned on.
Start your web browser on a computer or device connected to the network.
Type the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box and press the computer’s Enter key.

What is the default user name for the Basic Control option?

EPSONREMOTE. No password is set by default.

What is the default user name for all other options?

EPSONWEB. No password is set by default.

How do you change the password in the projector’s Network menu?

Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Remote Password
Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Web Control Password

How can I control the projector remotely?

Select Basic Control to control the projector remotely.

How can I change the projector’s menu settings?

Select OSD Control Pad to change the projector’s menu settings.

How do I display a test pattern?

Select Test Pattern to display a test pattern.

How do I view the projector’s status?

Select Status Information to view the projector’s status.

How can I open the Crestron Connected menu?

Select Crestron Connected to open the menu.

How do I open the advanced menu screen?

Select Advanced to open the advanced menu screen.

How do I display the image taken by the optional camera?

Select Remote Camera Access to display the image taken by the optional camera.

How do I adjust the lens?

Select Lens Control to adjust the lens (focus, zoom, and lens shift).

If the Remote Password is set to On, what do I need to do to access the projector?

You need to enter your username and password.

What is the default username?

The default username is EPSONREMOTE.

Is there a password set by default?

No password is set by default.

What happens when I select option 1 in the Basic Control menu?

It returns to the Home screen.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Basic Control menu?

It turns on the projector.

What happens when I select option 3 in the Basic Control menu?

You can access the input source selection controls.

What happens when I select option 4 in the Basic Control menu?

It turns the image on or off temporarily.

What happens when I select option 5 in the Basic Control menu?

It searches for sources.

What happens when I select option 6 in the Basic Control menu?

It turns off the projector.

What happens when I select option 1 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

It returns to the Epson Web Control Screen.

What happens when I select option 2 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

It displays the projector’s setting menus.

What happens when I select option 3 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

You can use your finger or mouse to navigate the menus.

What happens when I select option 4 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

It switches the operation method to button mode.

What happens when I select option 5 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

It resets the selected setting to its default value.

What happens when I select option 6 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

It returns to the previous menu.

What happens when I select option 7 in the OSD Control Pad menu?

It displays help topics.

Can I change all the settings using Epson Web Control?

No, you cannot change some settings using Epson Web Control.

What happens when I select option 1 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It returns to the Home screen.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It will adjust the focus adjustment slider.

What happens when I select option 3 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It will adjust the focus adjustment buttons.

What happens when I select option 4 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It will adjust the distortion adjustment slider.

What happens when I select option 5 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It will adjust the distortion adjustment buttons.

What happens when I select option 6 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It displays the Focus/Distortion screen.

What happens when I select option 7 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It displays the Zoom screen.

What happens when I select option 8 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It displays the Lens Shift screen.

What happens when I select option 9 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It displays the Test Pattern screen.

What happens when I select option 10 in the Focus/Distortion screen?

It displays the Memory screen.

Is the Zoom feature available on all lenses?

No, depending on the installed lens, the Zoom feature may not be available.

What does the blue square display in the Lens Shift screen?

It displays the current image position.

What does the red square display in the Lens Shift screen?

It displays the new image position.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Lens Shift Screen?

It displays the vertical image position and you can select it to change the value.

What happens when I select option 3 in the Lens Shift Screen?

It moves the image position up, down, left, or right.

What happens when I select option 4 in the Lens Shift Screen?

It moves the lens to the home position.

What happens when I select option 5 in the Lens Shift Screen?

It displays the horizontal image position and you can select it to change the value.

What happens when I select option 1 in the Test Pattern screen?

It displays available test patterns, and you can select to project a test pattern.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Test Pattern screen?

It turns off the test pattern display.

What happens when I select option 1 in the Memory screen?

It overwrites your current settings with saved settings.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Memory screen?

It saves your current settings to memory.

What happens when I select option 3 in the Memory screen?

It displays a list of saved memories.

What happens when I select option 4 in the Memory screen?

It erases a saved memory.

What happens when I select option 5 in the Memory screen?

It renames a saved memory.

What happens when I select option 1 in the Status Information screen?

It returns to the Home screen.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Status Information screen?

It displays a list of monitored settings.

What happens when I select option 3 in the Status Information screen?

It displays the setting status.

What happens when I select option 4 in the Status Information screen?

You can select it to view different status information.

In what mode is the Remote Camera Access Screen available?

It is only available in Normal mode.

What happens when I select option 1 in the Remote Camera Access screen?

It displays the image you captured using the Shoot button.

What happens when I select option 2 in the Remote Camera Access screen?

It takes a picture of the projected image using the optional external camera on the front of the projector.

What happens when I select option 3 in the Remote Camera Access screen?

It adjusts the image exposure.

What happens when I select option 4 in the Remote Camera Access screen?

It zooms in or out on the image you captured.

How can I view an image capture of the displayed image from a remote location?

You can take an image capture of the projected image and view it from a remote location using the projector’s optional camera.

What are some things to note when using the optional camera?

This feature is not supported when performing the following functions: Tiling, Tiling Assist, stacking assist tool, Screen Matching, Color Calibration, Lens Calibration, Message Broadcasting in the Epson Projector Management software.

How do I access Remote Camera Access from the projector’s menu?

Hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about five seconds or until you see the menu.
Make sure the Remote Camera Access setting is set to Off, then exit the menu.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and select the Others menu.
Make sure the Secure HTTP setting is enabled and return to the Network menu.
Select Remote Camera Access and press Enter.

How do I set a password for Remote Camera Access?

Select the Password setting and enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use these characters in the password: * (asterisk), : (colon), or a space character.)
Select On as the Remote Camera Access setting.

How do I connect to Epson Web Control from a computer or mobile device?

Open a web browser on a computer or mobile device connected to the projector over a network connection.
Enter the projector’s IP address in your browser’s address box to connect to Epson Web Control.

How do I view the projector’s IP address?

Select Net. Info. – Wireless LAN or Net. Info. -Wired LAN on the Network menu.

How do I take a capture of the projected image?

Select Remote Camera Access. (You may need to log in to access some of the options on the Epson Web Control screen. If you see a login window, enter your user name and password. The default user name is EPSONWEB and the default password is not set.)
Click Shoot to take a capture of the projected image. (You cannot capture warning or caution messages.)
Adjust the exposure if necessary. After making adjustments, shoot the projected image again and check it.

What should I do if I see a password screen?

Enter the password you selected for remote camera access. (You cannot perform any projector operations during shooting other than turning off the projector.)

How do I control a networked projector in Content Playback mode?

When Content Playback mode is turned on in the Settings menu, you can select projector settings, control projection, and edit playlists using a web browser.

How do I connect to the projector in Content Playback mode?

Make sure the projector is operating in Content Playback mode.
Make sure the projector is turned on and your computer or device is connected to the same network as the projector.
Start your web browser on the computer or device.
Type the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box and press the computer’s Enter key.

What options are available on the Epson Web Control screen in Content Playback mode?

Controls the projector remotely
Edits playlists for Content Playback mode
Opens the Time Table screen
Operates the projector’s menus with your finger or a mouse
Displays a test pattern
Displays the projector’s status
Opens detailed projector settings
Opens the Crestron Connected window (available when Crestron Connected is turned on)
Operates the projector’s lens
Registers or deletes playlist data on the USB device

How do I access the options on the Web Control screen?

Select the option corresponding to the projector function you want to control. (You may need to log in to access some of the options on the Web Control screen. If you see a login window, enter your user name and password. The default user name is EPSONWEB and the default password is not set.)

What are the Web Control Options in Content Playback Mode?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Turns the projector on or off
Selects the input source
Turn the video and audio on or off temporarily.
Turns Overlay Effect on or off to add color and shape effects to a playlist.
- Overlay Effect option is displayed when the current source is anything other than USB. When turning on, the Effects screen is displayed. You can add predefined color and shape effect filters to a playlist. You can also create a customized effect.
Selects the screen settings
Selects your favorite playlists
Displays playlist information such as length, overlay effects, and repeat playback
Adjusts the speaker volume

What are the Playlists options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Controls playback of the playlist
Edits, copies, or deletes the playlist
Creates a new playlist

What are the Create or Edit Playlist options?

Edits the playlist name
Enables repeat playback
Adds the playlist to your favorites list
Displays the images or movies in the order that they will be played
Adds items to the playlist
Deletes items from the playlist
Opens the Switch Image screen (specifies the time before the projector switches to the next item in the playlist)
Opens the Effects screen
Previews the playlist

What are the USB Memory Device options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Uploads images or videos to add to playlists on a USB device
Deletes images or videos on the USB device

What types of files can be uploaded using Epson Web Control?

You can upload .avi, .jpeg (.jpg), .png, .bmp, or .gif files using Epson Web Control. If you want to add .mp4 or .mov files to the playlist, use the Epson Projector Content Manager software or the Epson Creative Projection app.

What are the Time Table options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Turns the time table on or off

How can I get more information about the time table feature?

See the online Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide.

How do I access Remote Camera Access from the projector’s menu?

Hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about five seconds or until you see the menu.
Make sure the Remote Camera Access setting is set to Off, then exit the menu.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and select the Others menu.
Make sure the Secure HTTP setting is enabled and return to the Network menu.
Select Remote Camera Access and press Enter.

How do I set a password for Remote Camera Access?

Select the Password setting and enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use these characters in the password: * (asterisk), : (colon), or a space character.)
Select On as the Remote Camera Access setting.

How do I connect to Epson Web Control from a computer or mobile device?

Open a web browser on a computer or mobile device connected to the projector over a network connection.
Enter the projector’s IP address in your browser’s address box to connect to Epson Web Control.

How do I view the projector’s IP address?

Select Net. Info. – Wireless LAN or Net. Info. -Wired LAN on the Network menu.

How do I take a capture of the projected image?

Select Remote Camera Access. (You may need to log in to access some of the options on the Epson Web Control screen. If you see a login window, enter your user name and password. The default user name is EPSONWEB and the default password is not set.)
Click Shoot to take a capture of the projected image. (You cannot capture warning or caution messages.)
Adjust the exposure if necessary. After making adjustments, shoot the projected image again and check it.

What should I do if I see a password screen?

Enter the password you selected for remote camera access. (You cannot perform any projector operations during shooting other than turning off the projector.)

How do I control a networked projector in Content Playback mode?

When Content Playback mode is turned on in the Settings menu, you can select projector settings, control projection, and edit playlists using a web browser.

How do I connect to the projector in Content Playback mode?

Make sure the projector is operating in Content Playback mode.
Make sure the projector is turned on and your computer or device is connected to the same network as the projector.
Start your web browser on the computer or device.
Type the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box and press the computer’s Enter key.

What options are available on the Epson Web Control screen in Content Playback mode?

Controls the projector remotely
Edits playlists for Content Playback mode
Opens the Time Table screen
Operates the projector’s menus with your finger or a mouse
Displays a test pattern
Displays the projector’s status
Opens detailed projector settings
Opens the Crestron Connected window (available when Crestron Connected is turned on)
Operates the projector’s lens
Registers or deletes playlist data on the USB device

How do I access the options on the Web Control screen?

What are the Web Control Options in Content Playback Mode?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Turns the projector on or off
Selects the input source
Turn the video and audio on or off temporarily.
Turns Overlay Effect on or off to add color and shape effects to a playlist.
- Overlay Effect option is displayed when the current source is anything other than USB. When turning on, the Effects screen is displayed. You can add predefined color and shape effect filters to a playlist. You can also create a customized effect.
Selects the screen settings
Selects your favorite playlists
Displays playlist information such as length, overlay effects, and repeat playback
Adjusts the speaker volume

What are the Playlists options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Controls playback of the playlist
Edits, copies, or deletes the playlist
Creates a new playlist

What are the Create or Edit Playlist options?

Edits the playlist name
Enables repeat playback
Adds the playlist to your favorites list
Displays the images or movies in the order that they will be played
Adds items to the playlist
Deletes items from the playlist
Opens the Switch Image screen (specifies the time before the projector switches to the next item in the playlist)
Opens the Effects screen
Previews the playlist

What are the USB Memory Device options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Uploads images or videos to add to playlists on a USB device
Deletes images or videos on the USB device

What types of files can be uploaded using Epson Web Control?

What are the Time Table options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Turns the time table on or off

How can I get more information about the time table feature?

See the online Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide.

How do I access Remote Camera Access from the projector’s menu?

Hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about five seconds or until you see the menu.
Make sure the Remote Camera Access setting is set to Off, then exit the menu.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select Network Configuration and select the Others menu.
Make sure the Secure HTTP setting is enabled and return to the Network menu.
Select Remote Camera Access and press Enter.

How do I set a password for Remote Camera Access?

Select the Password setting and enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use these characters in the password: * (asterisk), : (colon), or a space character.)
Select On as the Remote Camera Access setting.

How do I connect to Epson Web Control from a computer or mobile device?

Open a web browser on a computer or mobile device connected to the projector over a network connection.
Enter the projector’s IP address in your browser’s address box to connect to Epson Web Control.

How do I view the projector’s IP address?

Select Net. Info. – Wireless LAN or Net. Info. -Wired LAN on the Network menu.

How do I take a capture of the projected image?

Select Remote Camera Access. (You may need to log in to access some of the options on the Epson Web Control screen. If you see a login window, enter your user name and password. The default user name is EPSONWEB and the default password is not set.)
Click Shoot to take a capture of the projected image. (You cannot capture warning or caution messages.)
Adjust the exposure if necessary. After making adjustments, shoot the projected image again and check it.

What should I do if I see a password screen?

Enter the password you selected for remote camera access. (You cannot perform any projector operations during shooting other than turning off the projector.)

How do I control a networked projector in Content Playback mode?

When Content Playback mode is turned on in the Settings menu, you can select projector settings, control projection, and edit playlists using a web browser.

How do I connect to the projector in Content Playback mode?

Make sure the projector is operating in Content Playback mode.
Make sure the projector is turned on and your computer or device is connected to the same network as the projector.
Start your web browser on the computer or device.
Type the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box and press the computer’s Enter key.

What options are available on the Epson Web Control screen in Content Playback mode?

Controls the projector remotely
Edits playlists for Content Playback mode
Opens the Time Table screen
Operates the projector’s menus with your finger or a mouse
Displays a test pattern
Displays the projector’s status
Opens detailed projector settings
Opens the Crestron Connected window (available when Crestron Connected is turned on)
Operates the projector’s lens
Registers or deletes playlist data on the USB device

How do I access the options on the Web Control screen?

What are the Web Control Options in Content Playback Mode?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Turns the projector on or off
Selects the input source
Turn the video and audio on or off temporarily.
Turns Overlay Effect on or off to add color and shape effects to a playlist.
- Overlay Effect option is displayed when the current source is anything other than USB. When turning on, the Effects screen is displayed. You can add predefined color and shape effect filters to a playlist. You can also create a customized effect.
Selects the screen settings
Selects your favorite playlists
Displays playlist information such as length, overlay effects, and repeat playback
Adjusts the speaker volume

What are the Playlists options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Controls playback of the playlist
Edits, copies, or deletes the playlist
Creates a new playlist

What are the Create or Edit Playlist options?

Edits the playlist name
Enables repeat playback
Adds the playlist to your favorites list
Displays the images or movies in the order that they will be played
Adds items to the playlist
Deletes items from the playlist
Opens the Switch Image screen (specifies the time before the projector switches to the next item in the playlist)
Opens the Effects screen
Previews the playlist

What are the USB Memory Device options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Uploads images or videos to add to playlists on a USB device
Deletes images or videos on the USB device

What types of files can be uploaded using Epson Web Control?

What are the Time Table options?

Returns to the Epson Web Control screen
Turns the time table on or off

How can I get more information about the time table feature?

See the online Epson Projector Content Manager Operation Guide.

How do you return to the Epson Web Control screen?

Press the button labeled 1 on the OSD Control Pad.

How do you display the projector’s setting menus?

Press the button labeled 2 on the OSD Control Pad.

How do you navigate the projector menus?

Use your finger or mouse.

How do you switch the operation method to button operation?

Press the button labeled 4 on the OSD Control Pad.

How do you reset the selected setting to its default value?

Press the button labeled 5 on the OSD Control Pad.

How do you return to the previous menu?

Press the button labeled 6 on the OSD Control Pad.

How do you display help topics?

Press the button labeled 7 on the OSD Control Pad.

Can you change all projector settings using Epson Web Control?

No. You cannot change some settings using Epson Web Control.

What is Crestron Connected?

Crestron Connected is a network monitoring and control system that lets you control and monitor your projector using a web browser.

How do you access the Crestron Connected operation window?

You can access the Crestron Connected operation window from Epson Web Control.

What do you need to do before using Crestron Connected?

You need to enable Crestron Connected in the projector’s Network menu before you can use it.

Where is the Crestron Connected setting located in the projector menus?

The setting is located in the projector’s Network menu at Network > Network Configuration > Others > Crestron Connected.

What can you use to monitor devices in the Crestron Connected system?

You can use Crestron RoomView Express or Crestron Fusion provided by Crestron.

What can you do using Crestron RoomView Express or Crestron Fusion?

You can communicate with the help desk and send emergency messages.

Can you use the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software when you use Crestron Connected?

No. You cannot use the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software when you use Crestron Connected.

Can you control the projector if it is in standby mode when using Crestron Connected?

Yes, but only if you set Standby Mode to Communication On in the Operation menu. If you do, you can control the projector even if the projector is in standby mode (when the power is off).

Who should you contact for additional information on Crestron Connected?

Contact Crestron for additional information on Crestron Connected.

What should you do if you want to use the Crestron Connected system when the projector is turned off?

You need to adjust the Standby Mode settings in the Extended menu.

How do you set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron Connected system?

To set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron Connected system, make sure your computer and projector are connected to the network, then follow the steps below:

Press the Menu button.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select the Others menu and press Enter.
Set the Crestron Connected setting to On to allow the projector to be detected.
When you are finished selecting settings, select Complete and follow the on-screen instructions to save your settings and exit the menus.
Turn off the projector, then turn it on again to enable the setting.

What happens when you enable Crestron Connected?

Enabling Crestron Connected disables the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software.

How do you enable the Crestron XiO Cloud service?

To enable the Crestron XiO Cloud service, set Crestron XiO Cloud to On.

How do you access the Epson Web Control Screen?

Start your Web browser on a computer or device connected to the network.
Go to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box.

How do you access the Crestron Connected settings from the Epson Web Control Screen?

Select the Crestron Connected settings.

Where can you find details about the Crestron Connected settings?

See the Crestron Web site for details.

How do you control and monitor your projector using Crestron Connected?

Once you have set up your projector to use Crestron Connected, you can control and monitor your projector using a compatible web browser:

Start your web browser on a computer connected to the network.
Type the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box and press the computer’s Enter key.
Select Crestron Connected to view the configuration page.

Who should you see for information on setting up the Crestron Connected configuration page?

See your network administrator for setting up the configuration page.

What should you do if you see a login window after typing the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box?

If you see a login window, enter your user name and password.

What is the default user name?

The default user name is EPSONWEB.

What is the default password?

There is no default password.

What is Secure HTTP?

You can use the HTTPS protocol to increase security between the projector and a web browser communicating with it. To do this, you create a server certificate, install it on the projector, and turn on the Secure HTTP setting in the projector menus to verify the reliability of the web browser.

Where is the Secure HTTP setting in the projector’s menu located?

The Secure HTTP setting is located in the projector menu at: Network > Network Configuration > Others > Secure HTTP.

What happens if you do not install a server certificate?

Even if you do not install a server certificate, the projector automatically creates a self-signed certificate and allows communication. However, because the self-signed certificate cannot verify reliability from a web browser, you see a warning about the server’s reliability when you access the projector from a web browser. This warning does not prevent communication.

How do you import a web server certificate using the projector menus?

You can create your web server certificate and import it using the projector menus and a USB flash drive:

Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration and saved in the root directory of the USB flash drive.
Press the Menu button on the remote control.
Select the Network menu and press Enter.
Select the Network Configuration setting and press Enter.
Select the Others menu and press Enter.
Select On as the Secure HTTP setting.
Select the Web Server Cert. setting and press Enter.
Select Register and press Enter.
Insert a USB flash drive into the projector’s USB-A port.
Press Enter to display the certificate list.
Select the certificate you want to import from the displayed list.
Enter the password and press Enter. The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.

Can you register digital certificates from your web browser?

Yes, you can also register digital certificates from your web browser.

What should you keep in mind when registering digital certificates?

Make sure to only register once, or the certificate may not install correctly.

How do you register digital certificates from a USB Device?

You can register the digital certificates for files on a USB device connected to the projector:

Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration.
Connect the USB device to the projector.
Press the USB button on the projector remote control. The PC Free screen appears.
Do the following as necessary to locate your files:
- To display files inside a subfolder on your device, press the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press the Enter button.
- To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to Top and press Enter.
- To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next page or Previous page and press Enter.
Press the arrow buttons to select one of the following certificate files:
- To register a Client Certificate or a Web Server Certificate, select the certificate file icon, press Enter, select Client Certificate or Web Server Certificate from the displayed menu, and press Enter again.
- To register a CA Certificate, select the CA certificate file icon and press Enter.
  
  The password screen is displayed (for Client or Web Server Certificates) or the certificate contents are displayed (for CA Certificates).
If you see the password screen, enter the certificate password using the keyboard that appears. The certificate content is displayed.
Check the content of the certificate to make sure it is correct.
When you finish checking the certificate, press the arrow buttons to select OK and press Enter. You see a registration completion message.

How do you register digital certificates from a web browser?

You can register the digital certificates on the projector for wireless LAN authentication:

Make sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration.
Make sure the projector is turned on.
Start your web browser on a computer or mobile device connected to the network.
Type the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address box and press the computer’s Enter key.

You see the Web Control screen and a prompt to enter a user ID and password.
Enter the following information in uppercase or lowercase letters, exactly as shown:
- For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)
- For the password, enter the password you set. There is no default password.
Select Advanced.
Under Network, select Certificate. You see a screen.
Click the Browse button, select the certificate file, and click Open.
Enter a password in the Password box, and click Send.
When you finish registering the certificate, click Apply to finalize your changes and complete the registration.

What are the different types of digital certificates you can register?

You can register these types of digital certificates:

Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)
CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)
Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)

What is the specification for the Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)?

Specification	Description
Format	PKCS#12
Extension	PFX, P12
Encryption	RSA
Hashes	MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length	512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Password	Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required

What is the specification for the CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)?

Specification	Description
Format	X509v3
Extension	DER/CER/PEM
Encryption	RSA
Hashes	MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length	512/1024/2048/4096 bit
Encoding	BASE64/Binary

What is the specification for the Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)?

Specification	Description
Format	PKCS#12
Extension	PFX, P12
Encryption	RSA
Hashes	MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512
Key length	512/1024/2048/4096 bit

How do you turn on the projector?

Connect the power cord to the projector’s power inlet.
Plug the power cord into an electrical outlet. The projector’s On/Standby light turns blue. This indicates that the projector is receiving power.
Press the On button on the projector or remote control to turn on the projector. The projector beeps and the Status light flashes blue as the projector warms up. After about 30 seconds, the Status light stops flashing and turns blue.

Note: With Direct Power On turned on, the projector turns on as soon as you plug it in. If you enable the Auto Power On setting in the projector’s Operation menu, the projector turns on when it detects a signal or cable connection from the selected port.

Note: When Quick Startup is enabled in the projector’s Extended menu, the projector becomes ready for use in several seconds the next time you press the On button.

Warning: Never look into the projector lens when the laser is on. This can damage your eyes and is especially dangerous for children and pets. If you are using the remote control to turn the projector on, make sure no one is looking into the lens or in front of the projector before turning it on.

Caution: Make sure no objects are blocking the light from the projector lens. Objects blocking the lens for an extended time can melt and light that is reflected back into the lens can cause the projector to malfunction.

If you do not see a projected image right away, try the following:

Turn on the connected computer or video device.
Insert a DVD or other video media and press the play button, if necessary.
Press the Source Search button on the projector or the Search button on the remote control to detect the video source.
Change the screen output from the computer when using a laptop.
Press the button for the video source on the remote control.
If the Home screen is displayed, select the source you want to project.

How do you use the home screen?

You can select input sources and other frequently used options from the Home screen.

To display the Home screen, do one of the following:
- Press the Home button on the remote control.
- Turn on the projector with the Home Screen Auto Disp setting enabled.
- Turn on the projector when no signal is received from the selected input source.
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control or control panel to navigate the screen, and press Enter to select an option.
Press the Home button to hide the Home screen.

Note: Your Home screen may look different from the illustration shown in the PDF. You can select the customizable menu options using the Custom Function 1 and Custom Function 2 settings in the Extended menu.

How do you turn off the projector?

Before turning off the projector, shut down any computer connected to it so you can see the computer display during shutdown.

Note: When using the A/V Mute feature, the laser is still on. To turn off the laser, turn off the projector.

Press the Standby button on the projector or remote control. The projector displays a shutdown confirmation screen.
Press the Standby button on the projector or remote control again. (To leave it on, press any other button.) The projector beeps twice, the laser turns off, and the Status light turns off.
If you use the projector continuously for more than 24 hours, or regularly turn it off by shutting off the power outlet, schedule periodic Light Source Calibration events in the Extended menu schedule settings.

Note: If Standby Confirmation is disabled and you press the Standby button on the remote control, the confirmation screen is not shown and the projector shuts off.

Note: With Epson’s Instant Off technology, there is no cool-down period so you can pack up the projector for transport right away (if necessary).

Note: If the Light Source Calibration setting is set to Run Periodically in the projector’s Management menu, light source calibration starts automatically if you turn off the projector and the following conditions are present:

100 hours have passed since the last light source calibration.
You have used the projector continuously for at least 20 minutes.

How do you select the language for the projector menus?

If you want to view the projector’s menus and messages in another language, you can change the Language setting.

Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Language setting and press Enter.
Select the language you want to use and press Enter.
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

How do you set the date and time?

You can set the date and time for the projector.

Note: If the Schedule Protection setting in the Password Protection screen is enabled, you cannot change the date and time settings.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Operation setting and press Enter.
Select the Date & Time setting and press Enter.
Select your date and time settings. Then select Set and press Enter to confirm your changes.
Select the Internet Time setting and set it to On.
Enter the IP address of the internet time server. Select Set and press Enter to confirm your changes.
When you are finished, press the Menu button to exit.

How do you resize the image with the Zoom button?

You can adjust the size of the image using the zoom buttons.

Note: Zoom is not available for the ELPLX02 and ELPX02WS lenses.

Note: Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy.

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Lens button on the control panel repeatedly until the zoom adjustment screen appears, or press the Zoom button on the remote control.
Press and hold the arrow buttons on the projector’s control panel or remote control to resize the image.
Press the Esc button when finished.

How do you focus the image using the Focus Buttons?

You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image using the focus buttons.

Note: Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before setting the focus, zoom, and lens shift for maximum accuracy. If you installed any of the following lenses, see the question below on focusing with a short throw lens instead: ELPLX02S, ELPLX02WS, ELPLU03S, or ELPLU04.

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Lens button on the control panel repeatedly until the focus adjustment screen appears, or press the Focus button on the remote control.
Press and hold the arrow buttons on the projector’s control panel or remote control to adjust the focus.
Press the Esc button when finished.

How do you focus the image when using an Optional Short Throw Lens?

If you installed an optional short throw lens (ELPLX02S, ELPLX02WS, ELPLU03S, or ELPLU04), you may need to first focus on the center of your screen and then correct any distortion in the surrounding area.

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Focus button on the remote control or press the Lens button on the control panel repeatedly until the focus adjustment screen appears.
Press the left or right arrow buttons until the center of the image is focused.
Press the Focus button on the remote control or press the Lens button on the control panel repeatedly until the distortion adjustment screen appears.
Press the left or right arrow buttons until the edges of the image are also focused.

How do you set the screen type?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select Display > Screen > Screen Type.
Select your screen’s aspect ratio and press Enter.
Press the Menu button to exit.
Adjust the aspect ratio for the projected image, if necessary.

How do you adjust the image position using lens shift?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Lens Shift button on the remote control or the Lens button on the control panel.
Press the arrow buttons on the remote control or the control panel to adjust the position of the projected image as necessary.
When you are finished, press the Esc button on the control panel or remote control.

Lens Shift Limits

The distance the image can be shifted varies depending on the installed lens. The limits are described in the following table. You can shift the image up to the listed percentage of the image height or width.

Lens	Vertical	Horizontal
ELPLX02S	+45%~70%	±15%
ELPLX02WS	+45%~70%	±15%
ELPLU03S	±24%	±10%
ELPLW05	±24%	±10%
ELPLU04	±60%	±18%
ELPLW06	±60%	±18%
ELPLW08	±60%	±18%
ELPLM10	±60%	±18%
ELPLM11	±60%	±18%
ELPLM15	±60%	±18%
ELPLL08	±60%	±18%

How do you adjust the image position using the screen position?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select Display > Screen > Screen Position.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control or projector to adjust the position of the image.
When you are finished, press the Menu button.

How do you display a test pattern?

Turn on the projector.
Press the Test Pattern button on the remote control or the down arrow button on the control panel.
Press the left or right arrow button on the remote control, or press Enter on the control panel to cycle through the available test patterns.
Adjust the image as necessary.
Press the Esc button to clear the test pattern.

How do you adjust the image height?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
To adjust the image height, rotate the front feet to extend or retract them.
If the image is tilted, rotate the front and rear feet to adjust their height.

How do you correct image shape with H/V-Keystone?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the H/V-Keystone setting and press Enter. Then press Enter again.
Use the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to select between vertical and horizontal keystone or balance correction and to adjust the image shape as necessary.
When you are finished, press Esc. After correction, your image is slightly smaller.

How do you correct image shape with Quick Corner?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.

How can I display the Geometry Correction screen?

You can press the Geometry button on the remote control.

How can I correct the image shape using the Quick Corner setting?

Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the Quick Corner setting and press Enter. Then press Enter again.
Use the arrow buttons to select the corner of the image you want to adjust. Then press Enter.
Press the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape. Press Enter to return to the area selection screen.
When you are finished, press Esc.

How do I reset adjustments made in the Quick Corner setting?

Press and hold the Esc button for at least 2 seconds to display a reset screen. Then select Yes.

How do I correct image shape with curved surface?

For the best results, project from the front of the screen onto a surface with a uniform arc radius and with the lens in the home position.

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the Curved Surface setting and press Enter.
Select the Curved Surface setting and press Enter.
Select the Correct Shape setting and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to select the area you want to adjust. Then press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons on the projector to adjust the image shape.
Press the Esc button to return to the Curved Surface menu screen.
Repeat the previous three steps to adjust other image areas.
If the image expands or contracts, continue to the next step to adjust the linearity. Select one of the following from the Curved Surface menu screen:
- Horizontal Linearity: Adjusts horizontal expansion or contraction.
- Vertical Linearity: Adjusts vertical expansion or contraction.
Select a displayed line to use as a baseline and press Enter. The selected baseline flashes orange and white.
Adjust the linearity by doing one of the following:
- Press the left arrow button to contract the distance between the lines closest to the baseline.
- Press the right arrow button to expand the distance between the lines closest to the baseline.
When you are finished, press the Menu button.

How can I display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image?

You can display a pattern using the Settings menu or by pressing the Test Pattern button on the remote control.

How do I reset adjustments made in the Curved Surface setting?

Press and hold the Esc button for at least 2 seconds to display a reset screen. Then select Yes.

How do I adjust the image tilt?

You can adjust the image tilt using the Quick Corner setting and fine-tune your adjustments using the Point Correction setting.

How do I correct image shape with Corner Wall?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the Corner Wall setting and press Enter.
Select the Corner Wall setting and press Enter.
Select the Corner Type setting and press Enter.
Select one of the following:
- Horizontal Corner: when the surfaces line up horizontally
- Vertical Corner: when the surfaces line up vertically
Press the Esc button to return to the Corner Wall menu screen.
Select the Correct Shape setting and press Enter.
Adjust the projector’s position and use lens shift to center the image over the point where the two surfaces meet.
You can press Enter to show or hide the image and grid to check the results.

How can I display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image when correcting image shape with corner wall?

You can display a pattern using the Settings menu or by pressing the Test Pattern button on the remote control.

How do you adjust the image shape?

Press and hold the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to adjust the image shape. Repeat the previous steps as necessary to adjust other image areas.

What do you do if the image expands or contracts?

Continue with the next step to adjust the linearity.

How do you adjust the linearity of the image?

Press the Esc button to return to the Corner Wall screen.
Select the Linearity setting and press Enter.
Adjust the linearity by doing the following as necessary:
- Press and hold the left arrow button to contract the distance between the lines closest to the left or top of the image.
- Press and hold the right arrow button to contract the distance between the lines closest to the right or bottom of the image.

When you are finished adjusting the linearity, what should you do next?

Press the Menu button.

How can you fine-tune the image tilt?

You can adjust the image tilt using the Quick Corner setting, then fine-tune your adjustments using the Point Correction setting.

How can you fine-tune the image shape?

You can use the projector’s Point Correction feature to fine-tune the image shape using points on a grid. This is useful for adjusting overlapping areas in multiple projected images that do not line up correctly.

What is the range of pixels you can move the points on the grid?

Between 0.5 to 600 pixels in any direction.

How can you display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image?

You can display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image using the Settings menu.

You can also display a pattern to aid in adjusting the projected image using the Test Pattern button on the remote control.

How do you access the Geometry Correction setting?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.

How do you access the Point Correction setting?

Select the Geometry Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the Point Correction setting and press Enter.

What do you do if you see a confirmation message when accessing the Point Correction Setting?

Press Enter.

How do you select the number of grid lines to display?

Select the Point Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the number of grid lines to display and press Enter.

How do you change the color of the grid lines?

Select the Pattern Color setting and select a suitable color.

How do you move to the point on the grid that you want to adjust?

Press the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to move to the point on the grid that you want to adjust. Then press Enter. The box changes from a single line to a double-lined square.

How do you correct the image shape?

Press the arrow buttons to correct the image shape in all necessary directions.

How do you show or hide the image and grid to check the results?

You can press Enter to show or hide the image and grid to check the results.

How do you return to the previous screen and select another point to correct, if necessary?

Press Esc to return to the previous screen and select another point to correct, if necessary.

How do you switch to the mode that corrects all points in a specified vertical column or horizontal row at once?

Hold down the Enter button to switch to the mode that corrects all points in a specified vertical column or horizontal row at once.

How do you select the column you want to adjust?

Use the left and right arrow buttons to select the column you want to adjust, and then press Enter.

How do you select the row you want to adjust?

Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the row you want to adjust, and then press Enter.

How do you select an image source if you have multiple image sources connected to the projector?

Make sure the connected image source you want to use is turned on.
For video image sources, insert a DVD or other video media and press its play button, if necessary.
Do one of the following:
- Press the Source Search button on the projector or the Search button on the remote control until you see the image from the source you want.
- Press the button for the source you want on the remote control.
- Press the Home button on the remote control and select your image source.

What happens if you turned on the Auto Source Search setting in the Extended menu?

The projector automatically switches to another detected image source if the signal to the current image source is lost.

What is the maximum range of the remote control?

Up to 98.4 feet (30 m) away.

Where can you point the remote control?

You can point it at the front or rear of the projector.

What conditions should you avoid using the remote control in?

Avoid using the remote control in conditions with bright fluorescent lights or in direct sunlight, or the projector may not respond to commands.

What should you do if you will not use the remote control for a long time?

Remove the batteries.

When should you connect the remote control to the projector using a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable?

When you use multiple projectors in the same room or when there are obstacles around the remote receiver.

What happens when the remote control is connected to the projector using a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable?

The remote receiver on the projector is disabled.

What are the different projection modes?

Front (default setting) lets you project from a table in front of the screen.
Front/Ceiling flips the image over top-to-bottom to project upside-down from a ceiling or wall mount.
Rear flips the image horizontally to project from behind a translucent screen.
Rear/Ceiling flips the image over top-to-bottom and horizontally to project from the ceiling and behind a translucent screen.

How can you change the projection mode?

You can change the projection mode using the remote control or by changing the Projection setting in the Extended menu.

How do you change the projection mode using the remote control?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Hold down the Shutter button on the remote control for 5 to 10 seconds. The image disappears briefly and reappears flipped top-to-bottom.

How do you change the projection back to the original mode?

Hold down the Shutter button for 5 to 10 seconds again.

How do you adjust the area you want to adjust when correcting the image shape?

Press the arrow buttons on the projector or the remote control to select the area you want to adjust. Then press Enter.

How do you adjust horizontal corners?

For horizontal corners, adjust the top area using the lowest point (indicated by the blue arrow) as your reference. Adjust the lower area using the highest point (indicated by the pink arrow) as your reference.

How do you adjust vertical corners?

For vertical corners, adjust the left and right areas using the points nearest the center of the image as your reference points.

How do you reset adjustments made to the image shape?

Press and hold the Esc button for at least 2 seconds to display a reset screen. Then select Yes.

How can the projection mode be changed to flip the image over top-to-bottom and/or left-to-right using the projector menus?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Projection setting and press Enter.
Select a projection mode and press Enter.
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

How can the image aspect ratio be changed?

Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Signal menu and press Enter.
Select Aspect and press Enter.
Select the aspect ratio you want to use for your input signal and press Enter.
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

How can the projector’s Color Mode be changed using the remote control to optimize the image for your viewing environment?

Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
If you are projecting from a DVD player or other video source, insert a disc or other video media and press the play button, if necessary.
Press the Color Mode button on the remote control to change the Color Mode. The image appearance changes and the name of the Color Mode appears briefly on the screen.
To cycle through all the available Color Modes for your input signal, press the Color Mode button repeatedly.

How can the brightness of the projector’s light source be adjusted?

Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Brightness Settings setting and press Enter.
Select the Light Source Mode setting and press Enter.
Select one of the following options:

Normal: Sets brightness to the maximum level (ideal for conference rooms, auditoriums, and lecture halls)
Quiet: Sets brightness to 70% and reduces fan noise (ideal for libraries, theaters, museums, and art galleries)
Extended: Sets brightness to 70% and extends the life expectancy of the light source (ideal for darker environments with ambient light, such as museums and art galleries, where a reduced maintenance cycle is desired)
Custom: Allows you to select a custom brightness level between 8% to 100%

If you selected Custom, select Brightness Level from the Brightness Settings screen and use the left and right arrow buttons to select the brightness.
If you selected Custom and want to maintain consistent brightness, turn on the Constant Brightness setting.
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

If Constant Brightness is turned on, what are the estimated remaining hours the projector can maintain constant brightness?

Display level	Estimated remaining hours
10000 or more hours
8000 to 9999 hours
6000 to 7999 hours
4000 to 5999 hours
2000 to 3999 hours
0 to 1999 hours

What is the estimated life span of the light source when Constant Brightness is off?

Brightness Level setting	Hours
100%	20000 hours
90%	21000 hours
80%	24000 hours
70%	30000 hours
60%	37000 hours
50%	47000 hours
40%	61000 hours
30%	71000 hours

What is the estimated life span of the light source when Constant Brightness is on?

Brightness Level setting	Hours
85%	6000 hours
80%	10000 hours
70%	19000 hours
60%	29000 hours
50%	41000 hours
40%	56000 hours
30%	78000 hours

How can image luminance be automatically optimized to improve the image contrast based on the brightness of the content projected? How can the light source be set to turn off automatically after a certain time period while projecting at a specific brightness level?

Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Image menu and press Enter.
To automatically adjust the amount of light based on the brightness of the image, select the Dynamic Contrast setting and press Enter. Choose from the following options:

Dynamic Contrast: Select On to automatically adjust the amount of light according to the brightness of the image.
Response Speed: Select Normal to adjust brightness at the standard speed or High Speed to adjust brightness as soon as the scene changes.
Black Level: Select the black level you want to project when the brightness level of the image signal is zero. (If you select 0%, the light source turns off.)

Press the Esc button to return to the Image menu.
To automatically turn off the light source after a certain time has elapsed while projecting at the specified video level, select the Lights-Out Control setting and press Enter. Choose from the following options:

Lights-Out Control: Select On to automatically turn off the light after a certain time has elapsed while projecting at the specified video level.
Lights-Out Signal Level: Select the brightness level for the current video signal. If the brightness level exceeds this level, the light source turns off automatically and then turns back on immediately.
Lights-Out Timer: Select the amount of time before the light source automatically turns off.

Press Menu to exit the menus.

What do the volume buttons control?

The volume buttons control any external speakers you connected to the projector. You must adjust the volume separately for each connected input source.

How do I lower or raise the volume on the projector?

To lower or raise the volume, press the volume buttons on the projector’s remote control.

How do I project images or other content from an external storage device?

You can project images or other content from an external storage device using Content Playback mode.

How do I project a playlist in Content Playback Mode?

Create a playlist and export it to a USB device using the Epson Projector Content Manager software.
Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Content Playback setting and press Enter.
Select the On setting and press Enter.
You will see a confirmation prompt.
Turn off the projector.
Turn on the projector again to enable Content Playback mode.
Press the Home button to make sure Content Playback mode is enabled.
Insert the USB device containing the playlist to the projector’s USB-A port.
Press the user button assigned to USB on the remote control to project the playlist.

How do I assign the USB option to a user button on the remote control?

To assign the USB option to a user button on the remote control, press the Menu button and go to Settings > User Button.

How do I select a specific playlist from the USB device?

To select a specific playlist from the USB device, press the Menu button and go to Settings > Content Playback > USB Viewer. Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to select the playlist you want to project.

What happens if there is more than one playlist on the USB device?

If there is more than one playlist on the USB device, the first or scheduled playlist is projected.

How do I add color and effects to the projected image in Content Playback mode?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Content Playback setting and press Enter.
Select the Overlay Effect setting and press Enter.
Select the Overlay Effect setting again and select On.
Select the Shape Filter setting and adjust the options as necessary.
Select the Color Filter setting and adjust the options as necessary.
Select the Lightness setting and adjust the brightness level.
Press the Menu button to exit.

What are the options I can adjust under the Shape Filter setting?

Shape: select a circle, rectangle, or other shape effect
Filter Effect: select an option to mask the inside or outside of the shape
Size: set the shape size
Position: set the shape position

What are the options I can adjust under the Color Filter setting?

Color Filter: select the color
Custom: adjust red, green, or blue individually

What should I do when using the effects feature?

When you use the effects feature, select Refresh Mode > Start on the Reset menu periodically.

How do I access the projector menu system and change projector settings?

Follow the instructions in the following sections to access the projector menu system and change projector settings:

Using the Projector’s Menus
Image Menu
Signal Menu
Settings Menu
Extended Menu
Network Menu
Info Menu
Reset Menu

How do I use the projector’s menus?

Press the Menu button on the control panel or remote control. You will see the menu screen.
Press the up or down arrow button to move through the menus listed on the left. The settings for each menu are displayed on the right.
To change settings in the displayed menu, press Enter.
Press the up or down arrow button to move through the settings.
Change the settings using the buttons listed on the bottom of the menu screens.
To return all the menu settings to their default values, select the Reset menu.
When you finish changing settings on a menu, press Esc.
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

What are the available settings on the Image Menu?

Color Mode
Brightness
Contrast
Color Saturation
Tint
Sharpness
White Balance
Image Preset Mode
Frame Interpolation
Super-resolution
Scene Adaptive Gamma
Gamma RGBCMY
Dynamic Contrast
Lights-Out Control
Reset (Image Menu)

How do I adjust the vividness of image colors for various image types and environments?

You can adjust the vividness of image colors for various image types and environments using the Color Mode setting under the Image Menu, or using the Color Mode button on the remote control. The brightness of the image varies depending on the selected mode.

What are the Color Mode options?

Dynamic: This is the brightest mode; ideal for use in a bright room.
Presentation: The images are vivid and brought to life. Ideal for showing presentations or watching a TV program in a bright room.
Natural: Reproduces colors faithfully. Ideal for projecting still images such as photos.
Cinema: Gives images a natural tone. Ideal for watching films in a dark room.
BT.709: Produces images that conform to the ITU-R BT.709.
BT.2020: Produces images that conform to the ITU-R BT.2020.
Multi-Projection: Minimizes the color tone difference between each projected image. Ideal for projecting from multiple projectors.

How do I lighten or darken the overall image?

You can lighten or darken the overall image using the Brightness setting under the Image Menu.

Does the Brightness setting affect light source brightness?

No, this setting does not affect light source brightness. To change the light source brightness, select Light Source Mode in the Settings menu.

How do I adjust the difference between light and dark areas of the image?

You can adjust the difference between light and dark areas of the image using the Contrast setting under the Image Menu.

How do I adjust the intensity of the image colors?

You can adjust the intensity of the image colors using the Color Saturation setting under the Image Menu.

How do I adjust the balance of green to magenta tones in the image?

You can adjust the balance of green to magenta tones in the image using the Tint setting under the Image Menu.

What are the Sharpness options?

Standard: You can adjust the image sharpness so that it is sufficiently balanced.
Thin Line Enhancement: Higher values enhance the details such as hair or fabric patterns.
Thick Line Enhancement: Higher values enhance the outline, background, and the other main parts of the objects in the image to show them clearly.

How do I adjust the overall tint of the image?

You can adjust the overall tint of the image using the White Balance setting under the Image Menu.

What are the White Balance options?

Color Temp.: You can adjust the overall tint of the image within a range from 3200K to10000K. Higher values tint the image blue and lower values tint the image red. When Color Mode is set to Dynamic, the set Color Temp. may differ from the actual Color Temp. of the light from the projector. Use this menu as a guide.
G-M Correction: Higher values tint the image green and lower values tint the image red.
Offset R/Offset G/Offset B/Gain R /Gain G/ Gain B: You can adjust the individual R (red), G (green), and B (blue) components of the offset and gain.

How do I set the Image Enhancement options as a batch using preset values?

You can set the Image Enhancement options as a batch using preset values using the Image Preset Mode setting under the Image Menu. The following settings are saved in the preset options:

Frame Interpolation
Super-resolution

What are the things I should note when using the Image Preset Mode?

To minimize delays, select Off.
If you select Off, you cannot set the other items in the Image Enhancement setting.
After selecting Preset 1 to Preset 5, you can fine tune each setting individually. The settings value in the preset option are overwritten.

How do I play fast moving images smoothly by producing intermediate frames between the original frames?

You can play fast moving images smoothly by producing intermediate frames between the original frames using the Frame Interpolation setting under the Image Menu. If your resulting images contain noise, set to Off.

When can’t I select the Frame Interpolation setting?

You cannot select this setting in the following cases:

Scale is set to Auto or Manual.
Edge Blending is set to Blending/Black Level or Black Level.
Image Preset Mode is set to Off.

How do I reduce blurring when projecting low resolution images?

You can reduce blurring when projecting low resolution images using the Super-resolution setting under the Image Menu. Higher values enhance details such as hair or fabric patterns using the Fine Line Adjust setting.

How do you enhance the outline, background, and other main parts of objects in an image?

Adjust Soft Focus Detail to a higher value.

What should you keep in mind when adjusting the Soft Focus Detail setting?

The Image Preset Mode setting cannot be set to Off.

How do you adjust the coloring of an image based on the scene to get a more vivid image?

Use the Scene Adaptive Gamma setting in the Image menu.

How do higher values affect Scene Adaptive Gamma?

Higher values increase the contrast.

How can you adjust the coloring of an image using gamma correction?

Go to Image > Advanced > Gamma and select one of the gamma correction values or refer to a gamma graph. For finer adjustments, select Customized.

What is the effect of selecting a smaller gamma value?

It reduces the overall brightness of the image, making it sharper.

What happens when you select a larger gamma value?

Dark areas become brighter, but color saturation in lighter areas may weaken.

What are some things to note when adjusting the Gamma setting?

Project a still picture for accurate adjustment.
Movies cannot be used for Gamma adjustment.
Medical images may not be accurately reproduced depending on settings and screen specifications.

How do you adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness of individual colors (R, G, B, C, M, Y)?

Go to Image > Advanced > RGBCMY.

How can you adjust the projected luminance based on image brightness?

Use the Dynamic Contrast setting.

How do you enable automatic light adjustment using Dynamic Contrast?

Set Dynamic Contrast to On.

How do you adjust the speed at which the amount of light is adjusted when the scene changes?

Use the Response Speed setting within the Dynamic Contrast options. Select High Speed for immediate adjustments.

How do you set the black level when the image signal’s brightness level is zero?

Use the Black Level setting. Selecting 0% turns off the light source.

How do you automatically turn off the light source when the signal level drops below a certain threshold for a set period?

Use the Lights-Out Control setting in the Image menu and set it to On.

How do you set the brightness level that triggers the automatic light source shutoff?

Adjust the Lights-Out Signal Level setting. The light source will turn on immediately when the image level exceeds the specified value.

How do you adjust the time delay before the light source automatically turns off?

Change the Lights-Out Timer setting.

How do you reset all the adjustment values in the Image menu to their defaults?

Go to Image > Reset.

How can you customize the input signal settings?

The Signal menu allows for customization. The available settings depend on the selected input source, and settings are saved for each source.

What are the settings available in the Signal Menu?

The following settings are available:

Aspect Blanking
Color Space
Dynamic Range
Video Range
EDID
Scale Switch
Backup Source
Reset (Signal Menu)

How do you adjust the image’s aspect ratio?

Use the Aspect setting in the Signal menu.

What does the Auto setting in the Aspect menu do?

It automatically sets the aspect ratio based on the input signal and Resolution setting.

What is the function of the Full setting in the Aspect menu?

It displays images using the full projection area while maintaining the aspect ratio.

What do the 4:3 and 16:9 settings do in the Aspect menu?

They convert the aspect ratio of the image to 4:3 and 16:9 respectively.

What do the H-Zoom/V-Zoom settings in the Aspect menu do?

They display images using the full width (H-Zoom) or full height (V-Zoom) of the projection area while maintaining the aspect ratio. Areas exceeding the screen edges are not projected.

What does the Native setting in the Aspect menu do?

It displays images as is, maintaining the original aspect ratio and resolution. Areas exceeding the screen edges are not projected.

What are the conditions for the Native setting to be available in the Aspect menu?

The current source must be one of the following:

HDMI
HDBaseT
SDI (EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W)

What are the other conditions that must be met for the Native setting in the Aspect menu to be available?

The Scale setting must be Off, or the Scale Mode setting must be set to Full Display.

Where can you find the Scale Mode setting?

It is located at Signal > Scale > Scale Mode.

What should you do before changing the aspect ratio?

Set the Screen Type setting in the projector’s Extended menu, located at Extended > Display > Screen > Screen Type.

What factors influence the available aspect ratio setting?

The selected Screen Type setting and the input signal from the image source determine the available aspect ratio settings.

Are there any legal implications to consider when using the aspect ratio function?

Using the aspect ratio function to reduce, enlarge, or split the projected image for commercial or public viewing may infringe on the copyright holder’s rights under copyright law.

How do you adjust the image position if there are margins between the image edge and the screen frame?

Use the Screen Position setting in the projector’s Extended menu, located at Extended > Display > Screen > Screen Position.

How can you hide images in a specific area of the projection?

Use the Blanking setting in the Signal menu. Adjust the area using the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control.

What is the maximum area that can be hidden using the Blanking setting?

Up to half of the projected image can be hidden in each direction, except for one pixel.

What condition must be met for the Blanking setting to be displayed?

The Content Playback setting must be Off in the projector’s Settings menu.

How do you switch the color space that handles the input image’s color information?

Use the Color Space setting in the Signal menu.

What does the Auto setting in the Color Space menu do?

It applies a suitable color space based on the image’s AVI InfoFrame.

When is the Color Space setting displayed?

It is displayed in the following cases:

The current source is HDMI, HDBaseT, or SDI (EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W).
Color Mode is set to something other than BT.709 or BT.2020.

How do you set the video range to match the input source setting?

Use the Dynamic Range setting in the Signal menu.

What does the Auto setting in the Dynamic Range menu do?

It automatically identifies the input signal’s dynamic range. The selected setting’s result is displayed as Signal Status.

How do you adjust the PQ curve of the dynamic range in the HDR PQ method?

Use the HDR10 Setting within the Dynamic Range options.

How do you adjust the HLG curve of the dynamic range in the HDR HLG method?

Use the HLG Setting within the Dynamic Range options.

When is the Dynamic Range setting displayed?

It is displayed in the following cases:

The current source is HDMI, HDBaseT, or SDI (EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W).
Color Mode is set to a value other than BT.709 or BT.2020.

When is the HDR10 Setting available?

It is available when Signal Status is set to HDR10 or Dynamic Range is set to HDR10.

When is the HLG Setting available?

It is available when Signal Status is set to HLG or Dynamic Range is set to HLG.

How do you set the video range to match the input source setting from the HDMI or HDBaseT port?

Use the Video Range setting in the Signal menu, located at Signal > Advanced > Video Range.

What does the Limited (16-235) setting in the Video Range menu do?

It sets the color tone range to 16 to 235.

What does the Full (0-255) setting in the Video Range menu do?

It sets the color tone range to 0 to 255.

How do you ensure consistent EDID settings across multiple displays with different resolutions?

Use the EDID setting in the Signal menu, located at Signal > Advanced > EDID. Set the EDID of the current source to match the standard display’s EDID.

What does the EDID Mode setting allow you to do?

It enables setting EDID options as a batch using preset values, including Resolution, Refresh Rate, and Color Depth. You can modify these preset settings if necessary.

When is the EDID setting displayed?

It is displayed only when the current source is HDMI or HDBaseT.

How do you reset all EDID adjustment values to their default settings?

Select Reset within the EDID settings.

How can you enlarge or reduce the image in both vertical and horizontal directions?

Use the Scale setting, found in both the Signal menu (Signal > Scale) and the Extended menu (Extended > Multi-Projection > Group Tiling > Scale).

What is the function of the Scale setting when using multiple projectors for a single image?

It allows adjustment of the scale of the image displayed by each projector.

What happens when Scale is set to Auto?

The clip position is automatically set based on the Edge Blending and Tiling settings. After selecting Auto, you can make fine adjustments manually.

What does the Manual setting in the Scale menu do?

It allows manual adjustment of the clip range and position.

What options are available in the Scale Mode setting, and how do they affect magnification?

Zoom Display: Maintains the image position and aspect ratio during magnification.
Full Display: Adjusts the image according to the image position and aspect ratio during magnification.

How do you adjust the horizontal and vertical magnification?

Use the Scale Horizontal/Scale Vertical settings, which allow adjustments in 0.01x increments.

What is the range of magnification available?

The magnification range is from 0.5x (minimum) to 10x (maximum).

How can you adjust the coordinates and size of each image while viewing the screen?

Use the Clip Adjustment setting, controlled with the arrow buttons.

What does the Clip Range setting show?

It displays the selected clipped area.

What can you do if there is a problem with the video signal while projecting from the HDMI1 input source?

You can set a backup source to automatically switch to using the Switch Backup Source setting in the Signal menu, located at Signal > HDMI1 Backup Source Setting.

What backup sources can you choose from?

The following backup sources are available:

HDMI2
HDBaseT
SDI (EB-PQ2010W/EB-PQ2010B)

What does the Status indicator in the HDMI1 Backup Source Setting show?

It indicates whether switching to the selected backup source is currently possible.

What steps should you take before checking the Status indicator for backup source switching?

Input the same signal to the HDMI1 In port and the backup source in advance.

What happens to the current input source information in the Status Information section of the Info menu after switching to the backup source?

It is not updated until the next input source switch.

What signal requirements must the backup source meet to ensure successful switching?

The backup source must have the same signals as the HDMI1 In source for the following:

Resolution
Frequency
Color Depth
Color Space

What happens to the Image menu settings after switching to the backup source?

The Image menu settings for the HDMI1 In source are applied to the image from the backup source.

How do you reset all the adjustment values in the Signal menu to their default settings, excluding the EDID setting?

Go to Signal > Reset.

What types of projector features can you customize using the Settings menu?

The Settings menu allows customization of various projector features. The available options are:

Geometry Correction
Volume
HDMI Link Control
Panel Lock
Lens Lock
Light Source Mode
Brightness Level
Constant Brightness
Estimated Remains
Energy Saving Mode
Remote Receiver
User Button
Test Pattern
Memory
Content Playback
NFC Settings
Reset (Settings Menu)

How can you adjust the image shape to be rectangular?

Use the Geometry Correction setting, found in the following locations:

Settings > Geometry Correction
Extended > Multi-Projection > Geometry Correction
Extended > Multi-Projection > Simple Stacking > Point Correction

What happens to the image size after Geometry Correction?

The image becomes slightly smaller.

What is the impact of changing the Screen Type setting on Geometry Correction?

The Geometry Correction settings are initialized.

What does the Off setting in Geometry Correction do?

It temporarily cancels geometry correction, but the correction values are still saved.

How does the H/V Keystone setting work?

It manually corrects distortion in the horizontal and vertical directions independently. If the aspect ratio is incorrect, use V-Balance and H-Balance to adjust the image balance. This method cannot be combined with other correction methods.

How does the Quick Corner setting work?

It corrects each corner of the projected image independently.

What does the Curved Surface setting in Geometry Correction do?

It corrects the corners and sides of an image projected onto a curved surface with the same radius.

What are the points to note when using the Curved Surface setting?

Move the lens position to the home position.
Excessive adjustment may result in uneven focus even after adjustments.
Setting Maintain Aspect Ratio to On after correction may prevent the corrections from being applied. Reset the corrections or reduce the correction amount and try again.
Changing the standard line during correction resets the current settings.

What does the Corner Wall setting in Geometry Correction do?

It corrects the corners and sides of an image projected onto a curved surface with right angles.

What are the points to note when using the Corner Wall setting?

Move the lens position to the home position.
Excessive adjustment may result in uneven focus even after adjustments.

How do you correct image shape with Point Correction?

Divides the projected image into a grid and corrects the distortion in 0.5 pixel increments by moving the selected point of intersection in any direction. You can move the points on the grid between 0.5 to 600 pixels in any direction, including outside the projection range. Hold down the Enter button to switch to the mode that corrects all points in a specified vertical column or horizontal row at once.

How do you adjust the column you want to adjust?

Use the left and right arrow buttons to select the column you want to adjust, and then press Enter.

How do you adjust the row you want to adjust?

Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the row you want to adjust, and then press Enter.

How do you save the shape of an image?

You can save the shape of an image you have adjusted and load it when needed.

How do you open the Geometry Correction screen?

You can also open the Geometry Correction screen using the Geometry button on the control panel or remote control.

How do you open the Memory screen?

You can also open the Memory screen using the Memory button on the remote control.

How do you adjust the volume of the speaker connected to the projector’s Audio Out port?

Go to Settings > Volume.

What happens if you start a presentation at a high volume setting?

Sudden loud noises may cause hearing loss.

What are the steps to take when adjusting the volume?

Always lower the volume before powering off, so that you can power on and then gradually increase the volume.

Where can you adjust the HDMI Link options that allow the projector remote to control HDMI-connected devices?

Settings > HDMI Link

What does Device Connections list?

Lists the devices connected to the HDMI ports.

What does the HDMI Link do?

Set to On to enable the HDMI Link features.

What are the options for Audio Out Device?

To output audio from the speaker connected to the projector’s Audio Out port, select Projector.
When an audio/video system is connected to the projector and you want to output audio from it, select AV System.
When an audio/video system is not connected to the projector, audio is output from the speaker connected to the Audio Out port even if Audio Out Device is set to AV System.

What does the Power On Link control?

You can control what happens when you turn on the projector or connected device.

What are the Power On Link options?

Bidirectional: automatically turns on the connected device when you turn on the projector, and vice versa.
Device -> PJ: automatically turns on the projector when you turn on the connected device.
PJ -> Device: automatically turns on the connected device when you turn on the projector.

What does the Power Off Link control?

You can control whether connected devices are turned off when you turn off the projector.

When do you adjust the HDMI Out setting?

Set when connecting multiple projectors of the same model in a daisy chain.

What are the HDMI Out Setting options?

Power On/Off Link: Set to On to synchronize the power on/off operation of all projectors.
Terminal End: Set to On only for the projector at the end of the daisy chain.

What do you need to do before adjusting the HDMI Out Setting options?

Set the HDMI Link setting to On first to adjust the options.

Where can you control projector button locking to secure the projector’s control panel?

Settings > Lock Setting > Control Panel Lock

What does the Full Lock option do?

Locks all buttons.

What does the Partial Lock option do?

Locks all buttons except the On and Standby buttons.

How else can you control projector button locking?

You can control projector button locking using the control panel lock button on the control panel.

How do you unlock the buttons on the control panel?

To unlock the buttons, hold down the Enter button on the control panel for approximately 7 seconds. A message is displayed and the lock is released.

Where can you disable the Lens Shift, Zoom, Focus, Distortion, and Calibration button operations on the remote control?

Settings > Lock Setting > Lens Lock.

Where can you select the brightness for the light source?

Settings > Brightness Settings > Light Source Mode
Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Brightness Settings > Light Source Mode

What are the options for Light Source Mode?

Normal: Maximum brightness. This makes the light source operation time approximately 20,000 hours.
Quiet: 70% brightness with reduced fan noise. This makes the light source operation time approximately 20,000 hours.
Extended: 70% brightness and extends the life expectancy of the light source. This makes the light source operation time approximately 30,000 hours.
Custom: You can select a custom brightness level.

When is the Custom Light Source Mode setting displayed?

Setting is only displayed when Constant Brightness is set to Off.

Where can you select the Custom brightness level you want?

Settings > Brightness Settings > Brightness Level
Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Brightness Settings > Brightness Level

When is the Brightness Level setting displayed?

This setting is only displayed when Light Source Mode is set to Custom.

Where can you maintain the brightness of the light source set in the Brightness Level setting?

Settings > Brightness Settings > Constant Brightness
Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Brightness Settings > Constant Brightness

When is the Constant Brightness setting displayed?

This setting is only displayed when Light Source Mode is set to Custom.

What are the additional considerations to make when using the Constant Brightness setting?

When set to On, you cannot change the settings for Light Source Mode and Brightness Level.
When set to Off, the Brightness Level setting changes according to the status of the light source.
When you use this function, we recommend setting Energy Saving Mode to Off.

Where can you check how long the projector can maintain constant brightness?

Settings > Brightness Settings > Estimated Remains
Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Brightness Settings > Estimated Remains

When is the Estimated Remains setting only displayed?

This setting is only displayed when Constant Brightness is set to On.

Where can you reduce the power consumption by automatically adjusting the light source brightness?

Settings > Brightness Settings > Energy Saving Mode.

How does Energy Saving Mode work?

When set to On, you can reduce the power consumption by automatically adjusting the light source brightness. The light source brightness is gradually adjusted over a period of 60 minutes and it does not ruin the image appearance. When you use the Multi-Projection or Constant Brightness features, set to Off to correct differences in the brightness between projectors.

When is the Energy Saving Mode function disabled?

When Edge Blending is set to Blending/Black Level or Black Level.
When Color Mode is set to Multi-Projection.
When Light Source Mode is set to Custom.

Where do you adjust the Remote Receiver settings?

Settings > Remote Receiver.

What happens when the Remote Receiver is set to Off?

Off turns off all receivers.

What do you do when the remote control does not operate stably due to noise from other devices?

You can limit reception of remote control signals to the selected receiver; Off turns off all receivers.

How can you turn on all remote receivers?

You can turn on all remote receivers by holding down the Menu button on the remote control for approximately 15 seconds.

Where can you assign menu options to the User buttons on the remote control for one-touch access?

Settings > User Button.

What menu options can you assign to the User buttons on the remote control?

Light Source Mode
Display the QR Code
Image Enhancement
Frame Interpolation
Link Menu
Content Playback
USB

When is the USB User Button option displayed?

The USB option is only displayed when Content Playback is set to On.

Where can you display a test pattern to assist in focusing and zooming the image and correcting image shape?

Settings > Test Pattern.

How do you change the test pattern while displaying a test pattern?

Press the Page button to change the test pattern while displaying a test pattern.

How do you cancel pattern display?

Press the Esc button to cancel pattern display.

What determines the test pattern’s shape?

The test pattern’s shape is determined by the Screen Type setting. Be sure to set the correct screen type before adjusting with the test pattern.

How do you set the Screen Type?

Extended > Display > Screen > Screen Type.

What should you do to set menu items that cannot be set while the test pattern is being displayed or to fine-tune the projected image?

To set menu items that cannot be set while the test pattern is being displayed or to fine-tune the projected image, project an image from the connected device.

How else can you display a test pattern?

You can also display a test pattern using the button on the control panel or remote control.

What happens if you capture the projected image as a test pattern during Freeze?

If you capture the projected image as a test pattern during Freeze, you can use the captured image as one of the test patterns.

Where can you save customized settings and then select the saved settings whenever you want to use them?

Settings > Memory.

What settings can you save?

You can save the following settings. You can register up to 10 memories with different names.

Image menu settings
Scale in the Signal menu
Light Source Mode and Brightness Level in the Settings menu
Edge Blending, Color Matching, and Black Level in the Extended menu

What lens positions can you save?

You can save the position of the lens adjusted using lens shift, zoom, focus, and distortion. You can register up to 10 memories with different names.

How many geometry correction memories can you save?

You can save the adjustment value of the geometry correction. You can register up to 3 memories with different names.

What are the memory options?

You can use the following options for each memory type:

Load Memory: You can load the saved memory. The settings applied to the current image are replaced with the settings in the memory.
Save Memory: You can save your current settings to memory.
Erase Memory: You can erase the selected memory settings.
Rename Memory: You can rename a saved memory.
Reset Memory Settings: You can delete all saved memories.

What are the additional considerations for saving memory settings?

A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a blue mark.
Saving over a previously saved memory overwrites the settings with your current settings.
The lens position when a memory is loaded may not completely match the lens position when the memory was saved. If there is a large discrepancy between the lens position, calibrate the lens.

How do you easily project your digital signage content?

Settings > Content Playback. You can easily project your digital signage content: playlists that contain images and movies saved on an external storage device.

What does Content Playback do?

Set to On to play back a playlist.

What does the Overlay Effect do?

You can add color and shape effects to the projected image.

What does the USB Viewer do?

You can select and play back a playlist saved on the USB flash drive.

When Edge Blending is set to Blending/Black Level or Black Level in the projector’s Extended menu, can you select the Overlay Effect setting?

No, you cannot select the Overlay Effect setting when Edge Blending is set to Blending/Black Level or Black Level in the projector’s Extended menu.

When the current source is USB and there is no playlist being played, can you select the Overlay Effect setting?

No, you cannot select the Overlay Effect setting when the current source is USB and there is no playlist being played.

When the current source is USB and a writing error has occurred, can you select the Overlay Effect setting?

No, you cannot select the Overlay Effect setting when the current source is USB and a writing error has occurred.

What are some methods for creating playlists?

Using Epson Projector Content Manager on your computer.
Using Epson Web Control with a Web browser.
Using Epson Creative Projection on iOS devices.

Where can Epson Projector Content Manager be downloaded and installed from?

Epson Projector Content Manager can be downloaded and installed from the Epson support site.

Where can Epson Creative Projection be downloaded from?

Epson Creative Projection can be downloaded from the App Store.

Who is responsible for any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store?

Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store are the responsibility of the customer.

How do you start a playlist when the USB function is assigned to the User button on the remote control?

You can start the playlist by pressing the User button when you assign the USB function to the User button on the remote control using the User Button setting in the projector’s Settings menu.

When will the playlist playback according to the schedule in the timetable?

The playlist will play back according to the schedule in the timetable when there is a timetable assigned.

How can you project your favorite playlist?

You can hold down the Num and numeric buttons to project your favorite playlist.

How can you set a remote control shortcut key?

You can set a remote control shortcut key using the software used to create the playlists.

What does NFC Write Protection prevent?

NFC Write Protection prevents anyone from scanning the projector’s settings.

What does NFC Write Password do?

NFC Write Password sets a password for scanning the projector’s settings up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.

If you do not set an NFC Write Password, what happens to NFC Write Protection when you turn on the projector?

If you do not set an NFC Write Password, NFC Write Protection is enabled automatically when you turn on the projector.

How do you scan the projector’s information using the NFC tag on the projector?

Set the NFC Write Password setting to Off.

Which adjustment values on the Settings menu can be reset to their default settings using the Reset setting?

You can reset all adjustment values on the Settings menu to their default settings, except for the following:

Audio Out Device
Power On Link
Power Off Link
HDMI Out Setting
User Button
NFC Settings

What do settings on the Extended menu let you customize?

Settings on the Extended menu let you customize various projector setup features.

What are the settings on the Extended menu?

Home Screen Menu Position
Message Position
Messages Display Background Startup Screen
Standby Confirmation
Air Filter Notice Screen
Panel Alignment
Color Uniformity
OSD Rotation
User’s Logo Projection
Direct Power On
Sleep Mode
Sleep Mode Timer
High Altitude Mode
Auto Source Search
Auto Power On
Startup Source
Quick Startup
USB Power A/V Mute Settings
Beep Indicators
Log Save Destination
Batch Setup Range
AC Voltage Monitoring
Date & Time
Lens Calibration A/V Settings
Standby Mode
HDBaseT Color Calibration
Projector ID
Batch Setup
Projector Grouping
Tiling
Edge Blending
Black Level
Reset (Multi-Projection Menu)
Screen Matching
Color Matching
Simple Stacking
Simple Blending
Schedule Settings
Language
Reset (Extended Menu)

When is the Home screen automatically displayed when Home Screen Auto Display is set to On?

The Home screen is automatically displayed when there is no input signal when turning on the projector when Home Screen Auto Display is set to On.

What do Custom Function 1/Custom Function 2 select?

Custom Function 1/Custom Function 2 select menu options to be assigned to the Home screen.

What can you select using the Menu Position setting?

You can select the position of the projector menu displayed on the screen using the Menu Position setting.

What can you select using the Message Position setting?

You can select the position of the projector messages displayed on the screen using the Message Position setting.

What can you control using the Messages setting?

You can control whether messages are displayed on the screen using the Messages setting.

What can you select using the Display Background setting?

You can select the screen color or logo to display when no signal is received using the Display Background setting.

When is the Display Background setting only displayed?

The Display Background setting is only displayed when Content Playback is set to Off.

What can you control using the Startup Screen setting?

You can control whether a special screen appears when the projector starts up using the Startup Screen setting.

When is the Startup Screen function disabled?

The Startup Screen function is disabled when you turn on the projector in Quick Startup mode.

What can you display using the Standby Confirmation setting?

You can display a confirmation message after pressing the Standby button on the remote control using the Standby Confirmation setting.

When Standby Confirmation is set to Off, how can you turn off the projector?

You can turn off the projector simply by pressing the Standby button once when Standby Confirmation is set to Off.

When can you display a message when Air Filter Notice is set to On?

You can display a message when a clog in the air filter is detected when Air Filter Notice is set to On.

How do you set the aspect ratio of the screen using the Screen Type setting?

Set the aspect ratio of the screen to fit the image into the projection area using the Screen Type setting.

When can you shift the image position horizontally and vertically using the Screen Position setting?

You can shift the image position horizontally and vertically using the Screen Position setting if there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected screen frame due to the Screen Type setting.

What should you adjust, if necessary, when using the Screen Type setting?

Adjust the aspect ratio for the projected image, if necessary, when using the Screen Type setting.

When the Screen Type setting changes, what happens to the EDID settings?

When the Screen Type setting changes, the EDID settings are automatically adjusted.

When are the settings for Screen Type and Screen Position only displayed?

The settings for Screen Type and Screen Position are only displayed when Content Playback is set to Off.

When is the Screen Type setting unavailable?

The Screen Type setting is unavailable when projecting images from a computer over a network.

What feature in the Epson Projector Management software is the Screen Type setting not supported by?

The Screen Type setting is not supported by the Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software.

When can you not adjust the screen position?

You cannot adjust the screen position if you set the Screen Type setting to the same aspect ratio as the projector resolution.

When is the Screen Position setting unavailable?

The Screen Position setting is unavailable when Screen Type is set to 16:9.

When is the Screen Position setting initialized?

The Screen Position setting is initialized if you perform Geometry Assist in the Epson Projector Professional Tool, Simple Blending, or Simple Stacking.

What can you use the panel alignment feature to do?

You can use the panel alignment feature to manually adjust the color convergence (the alignment of the red and blue colors) in the projected image.

How can you adjust the pixels horizontally and vertically using the panel alignment feature?

You can adjust the pixels horizontally and vertically in increments of 0.125 pixels within a range of ±3 pixels using the panel alignment feature.

When should you set Panel Alignment to On?

Set Panel Alignment to On to correct color misalignment in the projected image.

What should you select using Select Color?

Select the color you want to adjust using Select Color.

What should you select using Pattern Color?

Select the grid color displayed during adjustments using Pattern Color.

What does R/G/B display?

R/G/B displays the grid color in white.

What does R/G display?

R/G displays the grid color in yellow.

What does G/B display?

G/B displays the grid color in cyan.

What does Start Adjustments do?

Start Adjustments starts the panel alignment process.

How may the image appear while adjusting during the panel alignment process?

The image may become distorted while adjusting during the panel alignment process.

What happens to the image once adjustments are complete in the panel alignment process?

The image is restored once adjustments are complete in the panel alignment process.

How do you adjust the whole panel roughly during the panel alignment process?

Shift the whole panel to adjust the whole panel roughly during the panel alignment process.

How do you adjust the four corners of the panel precisely during the panel alignment process?

Adjust the four corners to adjust the four corners of the panel precisely during the panel alignment process.

If you need to make additional adjustments during the panel alignment process, what should you select?

If you need to make additional adjustments during the panel alignment process, select Select intersection and adjust to adjust more precisely.

What can you reset using Reset in the Panel Alignment menu?

You can reset all adjustment values on the Panel Alignment menu to their default settings using Reset.

How might image quality be affected after performing alignment in the panel alignment process?

Image quality may decline after performing alignment in the panel alignment process.

What happens to images for pixels that extend beyond the edge of the projected screen during the panel alignment process?

Images for pixels that extend beyond the edge of the projected screen are not displayed during the panel alignment process.

What can you use the color uniformity feature to do?

You can use the color uniformity feature to manually adjust the color tone balance in the projected image.

When should you set Color Uniformity to On?

Set Color Uniformity to On to adjust the color tone balance for the whole screen.

What should you select using Adjustment Level?

Select the adjustment level you want to adjust using Adjustment Level.

How many adjustment levels are there, and what do they range from?

There are eight adjustment levels, from white to gray to black.

How should you adjust the levels?

Adjust each level individually.

When should you set Adjustment Level to All?

Set Adjustment Level to All to adjust the tint for each color from level 2 to 8 in a batch.

When can you not perform further adjustments when setting Adjustment Level to All?

Once the values of red, blue, or green are at maximum or minimum at any level, you cannot perform further adjustments when setting Adjustment Level to All.

What does Start Adjustment do?

Start Adjustment starts adjustments for the selected adjustment level.

How may the image appear while adjusting during adjustments for the selected adjustment level?

The image may become distorted while adjusting during adjustments for the selected adjustment level.

What happens to the image once adjustments are complete for the selected adjustment level?

The image is restored once adjustments are complete for the selected adjustment level.

How should you adjust the screen during adjustments for the selected adjustment level?

Adjust the outer areas first, and then adjust the entire screen during adjustments for the selected adjustment level.

What can you reset using Reset in the Color Uniformity menu?

You can reset all adjustment values on the Color Uniformity menu to their default settings using Reset.

How uniform may the color tone be even after adjusting the color uniformity?

The color tone may not be uniform even after adjusting the color uniformity.

How can you rotate the menu display using the OSD Rotation setting?

You can rotate the menu display 90° using the OSD Rotation setting.

What can you save on the projector using the User’s Logo setting?

You can save an image on the projector using the User’s Logo setting and display it whenever the projector turns on.

When can you also display the saved image using the User’s Logo setting?

You can also display the saved image when the projector is not receiving an input signal using the User’s Logo setting.

What is the saved image called?

The saved image is called the User’s Logo screen.

What can you select as the user’s logo?

You can select a photo, graphic, or company logo as the user’s logo, which is useful in identifying the projector’s owner to help deter theft.

How can you prevent changes to the user’s logo?

You can prevent changes to the user’s logo by setting up password protection.

When should you display the image you want to project as the user’s logo?

Display the image you want to project as the user’s logo and then select the User’s Logo setting.

If the User’s Logo Protection setting in the Password Protection setting menu is set to On, what should you do before saving the user’s logo?

If the User’s Logo Protection setting in the Password Protection setting menu is set to On, set it to Off before saving the user’s logo.

When you copy the menu settings from one projector to another using the batch setup feature, what also happens to the user’s logo?

When you copy the menu settings from one projector to another using the batch setup feature, the user’s logo is also copied.

What should you not register as a user’s logo?

Do not register the information that you do not want to share between multiple projectors as a user’s logo.

What type of content can you not save?

You cannot save content that is protected by HDCP.

When Content Playback is set to On, when can you display the user’s logo?

When Content Playback is set to On, you can display the user’s logo only when the projector starts up.

What adjustments are temporarily canceled when you select User’s Logo?

Adjustments for image shape and display range are temporarily canceled when you select User’s Logo.

When is the User’s Logo setting unavailable?

The User’s Logo setting is unavailable when Test Pattern is set to Captured Image.

What can you set using the Projection setting?

You can set the way the projector faces the screen using the Projection setting so the image is oriented correctly.

How can you change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom?

You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom by holding down the Shutter button on the remote control for approximately five seconds.

When should you set Direct Power On to On?

Set Direct Power On to On to turn on the projector by plugging it in without pressing the power button.

When else does the projector also turn on automatically?

The projector also turns on automatically in cases such as recovery from a power outage.

When should you set Sleep Mode to On?

Set Sleep Mode to On to automatically turn off the projector after a period of inactivity.

What can you set using the Sleep Mode Timer setting?

You can set the time before the projector automatically turns off from 1 to 30 minutes using the Sleep Mode Timer setting.

When is the Sleep Mode Timer function only enabled?

The Sleep Mode Timer function is only enabled when Sleep Mode is set to On.

What is the purpose of High Altitude Mode?

When operating the projector at an altitude where the air is thin, the normal rotation speed of the fans is not enough to cool the projector. Set to On to increase the rotation speed of the fans at altitudes above 4921 ft (1500 m).

Note: When set to On, the projector’s operating temperature will rise.

What is Auto Source Search?

Set to On to detect the input signal automatically and project images when there is no input signal.

What is Auto Power On?

Select to automatically turn on the projector when it detects an HDMI video signal. This setting is available only when a signal is being input from the HDMI1 In port. This is useful for video meetings using Microsoft Teams Rooms. The projector turns on automatically when it receives an HDMI video signal from a device that supports Microsoft Teams Rooms and you can start the meeting immediately.

Note: When set to HDMI1, the power consumption increases while the projector is turned off. Make the setting based on your usage environment.

What is Startup Source?

You can select the image source you want to project when the projector is turned on in Content Playback mode.

What is Quick Startup?

You can set the time period for Quick Startup mode. The projector enters this mode when you turn it off. You can start projecting in approximately seven seconds by pressing the power button.

Note:

When set to anything other than Off, the power consumption increases while the projector is turned off. Make the setting based on your usage environment.
Set A/V Output to While Projecting first.
Available only when Auto Power On is set to Off.

What is USB Power?

Set to Always On to continue supplying power to the streaming media player when the projector is not projecting images. This lets the streaming media player start earlier, or perform its firmware updates automatically over a network if necessary.

Note:

Set A/V Output to While Projecting first.
This setting is available only when Auto Power On is set to Off.

What is A/V Mute Settings?

You can adjust the A/V Mute settings.

Fade-in: Set the number of seconds for a fade-in transition effect when displaying an image.
Fade-out: Set the number of seconds for a fade-out transition effect when hiding an image.
A/V Mute Timer: Turns off the projector automatically if A/V Mute is enabled and there has been more than two hours of inactivity.
Release A/V Mute: Select A/V Mute if you want to use only the Shutter button to turn off A/V Mute or if you want to send a command to turn off A/V Mute, or select Any Button to use any button to turn it off.

What is Beep?

You can control the beep that sounds when you turn the projector on or off.

What is Indicators?

Set to Off to turn off the indicator lights on the projector except when an error occurs.

What is Log Save Destination?

You can set where you want to save the operation logs for the projector. Select USB and Internal Memory to save logs as text files (.log) to a USB flash drive inserted into the projector’s USB-A port.

Note: This setting is only displayed when Content Playback is set to Off.

What is Batch Setup Range?

You can select which menu settings you want to copy to another projector.

All: Select this to copy all of the projector menu settings using the batch setup feature.
Limited: Select this if you do not want to copy the Password Protection, EDID, and Network menu settings.

What is AC Voltage Monitoring?

Set to On to monitor the projector’s voltage status and obtain a log when a warning, disconnection, or power blockage occurs. If you regularly turn off the projector by turning off the power outlet (direct shutdown), set to Off.

Note: You can view the log in the projector’s Info menu

Info > Voltage Warning Info

What is Date & Time?

You can adjust the projector’s system time and date settings.

Daylight Savings Time: Adjust the daylight saving time settings for your region.
Internet Time: Turn on this setting to update the date and time automatically through an Internet time server.

Note: When you set Schedule Protection to On in the Password Protection screen, you cannot change the time and date settings. Set Schedule Protection to Off first.

What is Lens Calibration?

You can view information about the lens currently in use. Calibration takes up to approximately 100 seconds. When calibration is finished, the lens returns to the same position it was in before calibration. The following lenses return to the standard position:

ELPLX02S/02
ELPLX02WS/02W

What is A/V Settings?

You can select to output audio to an external device when the projector is in standby mode (when the power is off). Select Always On to output audio to external devices when the projector does not project any images.

Note:

Available only when Quick Startup is set to Off, and Auto Power On is set to Off.
When set to Always On, you can move the lens position to the home position even if the projector is in standby mode.

What is Standby Mode?

Set to Communication On to monitor and control the projector over a network.

Note:

Set A/V Output to While Projecting first.
Available only when Auto Power On is set to Off.
Available only when USB Power is set to On While Projecting.
Even if Communication On is set for a wired LAN connection, if the connection between the projector and the network device is not established for more than 15 minutes, the projector will enter a power status in which network communication is not possible. The following shows the statuses when the connection between the projector and the network device is not established:
- A LAN cable is not connected
- The power is off for network devices such as hubs.

What is HDBaseT?

You can select the communication settings for connections to an HDBaseT transmitter or switcher.

Control Communications: You can enable or disable communication from the Ethernet and serial ports on the HDBaseT transmitter or switcher; set to On to disable the projector’s LAN, RS-232C, and Remote ports. To use control communication even if the projector is in standby mode, select Always On as the A/V Output setting in the projector’s Extended menu.
- Extended > A/V Settings > A/V Output
Extron XTP: Set to On when you connect an Extron XTP transmitter or switcher to the HDBaseT ports. Visit the Extron web site for more details on the XTP system.

Note:

Control Communications is only displayed when Extron XTP is set to Off.
When Extron XTP is set to On, the cooling fans may run even in standby status. This is not a malfunction.
When A/V Settings is set to Always On, and Control Communications is set to On, communication from the HDBaseT port is enabled even if the projector is in standby mode.

What is Color Calibration?

The color calibration process adjusts the color balance and brightness that has deteriorated over time based on images taken by the optional external camera, and restores the default image quality.

Color Calibration: Set to On to enable the color calibration process.
Start Auto Adjustment: Starts auto adjustment.
Undo: You can undo auto adjustment.
Redo: Select after selecting Undo to restore the image to the status after auto adjustment.
Color Uniformity: You can adjust the color tone balance for the whole image.
Reset: You can reset all adjustment values on the Color Calibration menu to their default settings.

Note: This function is not available when you use the following optional lenses: ELPLX02, ELPLX02W, ELPLL08.

What is Projector ID?

You can set the projector to a particular ID number which allows you to use a remote control to individually control projectors. This is useful when you want to control multiple projectors using one remote control.

Note:

You need to set the remote control’s ID to match the projector’s ID to operate only a particular projector. To set the remote control’s ID, set the remote control ID switch to On. Press the ID button on the remote control and press the numeric button that matches the projector’s ID within five seconds. (Enter a one digit or two-digit number.)
If you do not know the projector’s ID, press the ID button during projection to temporarily display the projector’s ID and the remote control’s ID on the screen. (This is only available when you use the remote control that comes with this projector.)
You can set up to 30 IDs.

What is Batch Setup?

You can perform necessary settings as a batch by using this menu before you start projecting the same image from multiple projectors to create one large image.

Initializes the following settings for Multi-Projection:
- Color Uniformity
- Screen Matching
- Color Matching
- Image
- Black Level
- Brightness Level
Changes the following settings for Multi-Projection:
- Multi-Projection for Color Mode
- Off for Dynamic Contrast
- Custom for Light Source Mode
- Off for Sleep Mode

What is Projector Grouping?

You can create a group of projectors that you can control simultaneously.

What is Tiling?

You can project the same image from up to 15 projectors to create one large image using the Tiling feature.

Tiling: When the optional external camera is installed, set to Auto to configure tiling automatically. If you do not install the optional external camera or tiling the images automatically was unsuccessful, select Manual, and then select the Layout and Location Setup settings individually.
Layout: Select the number of rows and columns you are setting up.
Location Setup: Select the position of each projected image as follows:
- Row Order: to layout the screens from top to bottom, starting with 1 at the top, in sequential order.
- Column Order: to layout the screens from left to right, starting with A on the left, in alphabetical order
Location Info: You can view the name, IP address, and ID of the projector you set.

Note:

Make sure nothing is blocking the optional external camera while performing automatic tiling.
Do not change any of the projector names or IP addresses, or the images will not be adjusted automatically.
The auto tiling function is not available when you use the following optional lenses: ELPLX02S, ELPLX02WS, and ELPLL08.

What is Edge Blending?

You can blend the border between multiple images to create a seamless screen.

Edge Blending: Set to Blending/Black Level or Black Level to enable the Edge Blending feature. Select Black Level when you do not need to use the projector’s Geometry Correction feature, such as when adjusting the blending area using another device such as a media server. When Black Level is set, Line Guide, Pattern Guide, and Guide Color are not available. When not projecting images from multiple projectors, select Off. When Edge Blending is set to Black Level or Off, Blend Start Position/Blend Range/Blend Curve from Top Edge/Bottom Edge/Left Edge/Right Edge are not available.
Top Edge/Bottom Edge/Left Edge/Right Edge: Select the edge you want to blend on each projector.
- Blending: to turn on the Edge Blending feature for the selected edge. Gradation is applied to the blending range.
- Blend Start Position: to adjust the point where edge blending begins in 1-pixel increments. The blending start position is displayed with a red line.

What are the options available when Edge Blending is set to Blending/Black Level?

The following options are available when Edge Blending is set to Blending/Black Level:

Blend Start Position
Blend Range to select the width of the blended area in 1-pixel increments. You can select up to 70% of the projector’s resolution.
Blend Curve to select a gradient for the shaded area on the projected image.
Line Guide Set to On to display a guide on the blended area.
Pattern Guide Set to On to display a grid to match the blended area.
Guide Color Select a combination of guide colors.

What should the Color Mode setting be set to in the projector’s Image menu for all of the projectors?

The Color Mode setting should be set to Multi-Projection in the projector’s Image menu for all of the projectors.

What should you select when adjusting the blending area using another device such as a media server?

Select Black Level when adjusting the blending area using another device such as a media server.

Where can the Black Level setting be found in the Extended Menu?

The Black Level setting can be found in the following locations in the Extended Menu:

Extended > Multi-Projection > Black Level
Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Black Level

What can you adjust with the Black Level setting?

You can adjust the brightness and tone differences in overlapping images.

How should you adjust the brightness and tone of the areas?

The adjustment areas are displayed based on the Edge Blending setting. When multiple screens are overlapping, adjust overlapping areas starting with the brightest areas first. Adjust the non-overlapping area (darkest part) last.

What can you do if the tone for some areas does not match?

If the tone for some areas does not match, you can adjust it individually using Area Correction.

What does the Reset button do on the Black Level menu?

The Reset button on the Black Level menu will reset all adjustment values on the Black Level menu to their default settings.

What conditions must be met in the Edge Blending settings for the Black Level feature to be available?

The Black Level feature is only available when the following conditions are met in the Edge Blending settings:

When Edge Blending is set to anything except for Off.
When at least one of Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge, and Right Edge are set to On.

Can you adjust the Black Level setting when a test pattern is displayed?

You cannot adjust the Black Level setting when a test pattern is displayed.

What may happen if the Geometry Correction value is very large?

If the Geometry Correction value is very large, you may not be able to adjust the Black Level correctly.

When might the brightness and tone differ in areas where the images overlap?

The brightness and tone may differ in areas where the images overlap as well as in other areas even after performing Black Level adjustment.

What happens to the Black Level setting if you change one of Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge, and Right Edge?

If you change one of Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge, and Right Edge, the Black Level setting returns to its default value.

Where is the Reset option located in the Multi-Projection menu?

The Reset option is located at Extended > Multi-Projection > Reset in the Multi-Projection menu.

What does the Reset option do in the Multi-Projection menu?

The Reset option in the Multi-Projection menu allows you to reset all adjustment values on the Multi-Projection menu to their default settings.

Where is the Screen Matching option located in the Extended Menu?

The Screen Matching option is located at Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching.

What can you adjust with the Screen Matching option?

You can adjust the tint, brightness, black level, and blend curve of multiple projectors so that they match better.

How are the brightness and tint for multiple projectors corrected if the projectors are on a network?

If your projectors are on a network, the brightness and tint for multiple projectors are corrected automatically based on the darkest projector.

How can you adjust the tint and brightness of multiple projectors if they are not on a network or automatic adjustment was unsuccessful?

You can adjust the tint and brightness of multiple projectors manually if they are not on a network or automatic adjustment was unsuccessful.

Under what conditions is the auto adjustment feature available for screen matching?

The auto adjustment feature is only available under the following conditions:

When you set the position of each image using Location Setup in the Tiling menu.
When Color Calibration is set to On.

When can you undo or redo the screen matching procedure?

You can undo or redo the screen matching procedure only when Light Source Mode is set to Custom.

How long does screen matching take?

The required time for screen matching varies depending on the projector layout. It takes up to approximately 18 minutes.

When is the Screen Matching function not available?

This function is not available when you use the following optional lenses: ELPLX02S, ELPLX02WS, or ELPLL08.

Where is the Color Matching option located in the Extended Menu?

The Color Matching option is located at Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Color Matching.

What can you adjust with the Color Matching option?

You can adjust the tint and brightness for the color tone from white to black.

What is displayed during color matching and why?

During color matching, half of the overlapped area is displayed in black so that you can check the edge of the image easily.

What does the Adjustment Level setting do in Color Matching?

The Adjustment Level setting lets you select the adjustment level you want to adjust. There are eight adjustment levels, from white to gray to black. Adjust each level individually.

What does setting the Adjustment Level to All do in Color Matching?

Setting the Adjustment Level to All adjusts the tint for each color from level 2 to 8 in a batch. (Once the values of red, blue, or green are at maximum or minimum at any level, you cannot perform further adjustments.)

What can you adjust with the Red/Green/Blue setting?

You can adjust the tone for each color with the Red/Green/Blue setting.

What does the Brightness setting adjust?

The Brightness setting allows you to adjust the image brightness.

Where is the Simple Stacking option located in the Extended Menu?

The Simple Stacking option is located at Extended > Multi-Projection > Simple Stacking.

What does Simple Stacking allow you to do?

Simple Stacking allows you to easily create a bright projected image by overlapping the images of two projectors connected by wired LAN.

What does the Point Correction option do in Simple Stacking?

The Point Correction option allows you to adjust the image shape of the primary projector. Select Quick Corner to correct it roughly, and then select Point Correction to correct it in detail.

What does the Start Auto Adjustment option do in Simple Stacking?

The Start Auto Adjustment option automatically adjusts the projected image using the external camera. The projector on which you perform this feature becomes the primary projector, and the images from other projectors are overlapped based on the primary projector’s image.

What should you do before using the Start Auto Adjustment option in Simple Stacking?

Make sure you do the following before adjusting:

Connect two projectors directly using a LAN cable.
Set the DHCP setting to On in the projector’s Network menu for two projectors. (Network > Network Configuration > Wired LAN > IP Settings)
Adjust the image position, shape, and focus on the primary projector. If you adjust the image shape of the primary projector, use the Point Correction menu in the Simple Stacking setting.

How long does the simple stacking process take?

The required time for simple stacking varies depending on the projector layout. It takes up to approximately four minutes.

What happens to the Display Background setting after completing the simple stacking process?

After completing the simple stacking process, Display Background is automatically set to Black. (Extended > Display > Display Background)

When is the Simple Stacking function not available?

This function is not available when you use the following optional lenses: ELPLX02S, ELPLX02WS, or ELPLL08.

Where is the Simple Blending option located in the Extended Menu?

The Simple Blending option is located at Extended > Multi-Projection > Simple Blending.

What does the Simple Blending option do?

The Simple Blending option makes simple blending settings.

What does the Location Setup option do in Simple Blending?

The Location Setup option sets the projector placement.

What does the Whole Screen Aspect option do in Simple Blending?

The Whole Screen Aspect option selects the aspect ratio for composited screens. Selectable items vary depending on the screen type settings.

What are the Whole Screen Aspect Supported Screen Types and their corresponding selectable items?

Whole Screen Aspect	Supported Screen Types
21:9 (EDID 3440×1440)	21:9 (EDID 2560×1080)
16:6 (EDID 2880×1080)	16:6 (EDID 1920×720)
3:1 (EDID 3240×1080)	16:9, 16:10, 4:3
32:10 (EDID 3456×1080)	16:9, 16:10, 4:3, 21:9
32:9 (EDID 3200×900)	16:9, 16:10, 4:3, 21:9, 16:6

What does the Start Auto Adjustment option do in Simple Blending?

The Start Auto Adjustment option in Simple Blending automatically adjusts projected images using an external camera.

What does the Screen Matching option do in Simple Blending?

The Screen Matching option in Simple Blending corrects the hue, brightness, black levels, and blending curves for multiple projectors.

Where are the Schedule Settings options located in the Extended Menu?

The Schedule Settings options are located in the following locations in the Extended Menu:

Extended > Schedule Settings
Extended > Multi-Projection > Screen Matching > Schedule Settings

What can you do with the Schedule Settings?

You can schedule various projector tasks.

How do you schedule events in Schedule Settings?

To schedule events in Schedule Settings:

Select Add New to schedule events.
To save your events, select Setup complete and then select Yes.

What can you do with Event Settings in Schedule Settings?

Use Event Settings to select the event details you want to perform. Select No Change for items that you do not want to change when the event occurs.

What can you do with Date/Time Settings in Schedule Settings?

Use Date/Time settings to select the date and time at which you want the event to occur. You can schedule events up to four weeks later.

What does the Schedule Reset option do in Schedule Settings?

The Schedule Reset option allows you to delete all scheduled events. To delete events completely, you need to select Setup complete and select Yes.

What does the Setup complete option do in Schedule Settings?

The Setup complete option saves your changes in the Schedule Settings menu.

What warning is given regarding scheduling the projector to turn on automatically?

Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. If you schedule the projector to turn on automatically, flammable objects in front of the lens could catch on fire.

How many events can you schedule in the Schedule menu?

You can schedule up to 30 events in the Schedule menu.

How many events can you schedule in the Extended Schedule menu for Color Calibration or Screen Matching?

In the Extended Schedule menu, you can schedule only one event for Color Calibration or Screen Matching.

When do Light Source Calibration events not start?

Light Source Calibration events do not start if the projector is used continuously for more than 24 hours, or regularly turned off by turning off the power outlet.

What events should you set to ensure Light Source Calibration starts properly?

Set the following events:

Turning on the projector 20 minutes before performing light source calibration.
Performing light source calibration periodically.

Where is the Language option located in the Extended Menu?

The Language option is located at Extended > Language.

What can you do with the Language option?

You can select the language for projector menu and message displays.

Where is the Reset option located in the Extended Menu?

The Reset option is located at Extended > Reset.

What can you do with the Reset option in the Extended Menu?

You can reset all adjustment values on the Extended menu to their default settings, except for the following:

Screen
Projection
High Altitude Mode
Auto Source Search
USB Power
Release A/V Mute
A/V Settings
Standby Mode
HDBaseT
Projector ID
Language
Point Correction (in the Simple Stacking menu)
Screen Matching (Simple Blending menu)

What happens when you set User’s Logo Protection to On in the Password Protection screen?

When you set User’s Logo Protection to On in the Password Protection screen, you cannot change the following settings related to user’s logo display:

Display Background
Startup Screen

Set User’s Logo Protection to Off first to change these settings.

What do the settings on the Network menu allow you to do?

Settings on the Network menu let you view network information and set up the projector for controlling over a network.

What happens when you set Network Protection to On from the Password Protection screen?

When you set Network Protection to On from the Password Protection screen, you cannot change the network settings.

How do you turn off the Network Protection setting?

Hold down the Freeze button for more than five seconds to turn off the Network Protection setting.

What will happen if no password has been set when you try to turn off Network Protection?

If no password has been set, a screen prompting you to set a password is displayed. Follow the on-screen instructions to set the password.

Where is the Wireless Mode option located in the Network Menu?

The Wireless Mode option is located at Network > Wireless Mode.

What does the Wireless Mode setting allow you to do?

The Wireless Mode setting allows you to configure your wireless LAN settings.

What should you do to project images via wireless LAN?

Set Wireless Mode to Wireless LAN On to project images via wireless LAN.

What should you do to prevent unauthorized access by others if you do not want to connect via wireless LAN?

Set Wireless Mode to Off to prevent unauthorized access by others if you do not want to connect via wireless LAN.

What do you need to do to connect the projector to the computer using a wireless network system?

To connect the projector to the computer using a wireless network system, install the optional wireless LAN module.

Where is the Net. Info. – Wireless LAN option located in the Network Menu?

The Net. Info. – Wireless LAN option is located at Network > Net. Info. – Wireless LAN.

What does the Net. Info. – Wireless LAN option allow you to do?

The Net. Info. – Wireless LAN option allows you to view wireless network status and details.

Where is the Net. Info. – Wired LAN option located in the Network Menu?

The Net. Info. – Wired LAN option is located at Network > Net. Info. – Wired LAN.

What does the Net. Info – Wired LAN option allow you to do?

The Net. Info. – Wired LAN option allows you to view wired network status and details.

Where is the Display the QR Code option located in the Network Menu?

The Display the QR code option is located at Network > Display the QR Code.

What does the Display the QR Code option allow you to do?

The Display the QR code option allows you to view a QR code for connecting with iOS or Android devices using the Epson iProjection app.

Where is the Remote Camera Access option located in the Network Menu?

The Remote Camera Access option is located at Network > Remote Camera Access.

What does the Remote Camera Access option allow you to do?

The Remote Camera Access option allows you to display the image taken by the optional external camera using Epson Web Control.

What does setting Remote Camera Access to On do?

Setting Remote Camera Access to On enables the Remote Camera Access function. You need to set a password to use the remote camera access function.

What is the Password setting used for in Remote Camera Access?

The Password setting is useful for accessing the projector over the Web. (No password is set by default.) Enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use the following characters: * : spaces.)

Where is the Projector Name option located in the Network Menu?

The Projector Name option is located at Network > Network Configuration > Basic > Projector Name.

What is the Projector Name option used for?

The Projector Name is useful to identify the projector over the network. Enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use the following characters: " * + , / : ; < => ? [ \ ] ` | spaces.)

Where can the user find information on selecting wireless network settings manually?

Refer to the “Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually” section.

What is the PJLink Password useful for?

This is useful for projector control using the PJLink protocol. Enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use spaces and any symbols other than @.)

What is the Remote Password useful for?

This is useful for accessing the projector using the Web Remote.

What is the default user name and password for the Remote Password?

User name: EPSONREMOTE.

Password: No password is set by default. Enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use * : spaces.)

What is the Web Control Password useful for?

This is useful for accessing the projector over the Web.

What is the default user name and password for the Web Control Password?

User name: EPSONWEB.

Password: No password is set by default. Enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use * : spaces.)

What is the Monitor Password useful for?

This is useful for monitoring projectors with a switcher and a system controller or using Epson Projector Management ver.5.30 or earlier.

(No password is set by default.) Enter up to 16 alphanumeric characters (do not use spaces and any symbols other than @).

What is the Moderator Password useful for?

This is useful for accessing the projector over the Web using Epson iProjection.

What is the default user name and password for the Moderator Password?

User name: EPSONWEB.

Password: No password is set by default. Enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use * : spaces.)

What is the Projector Keyword useful for?

You can turn on a security password to prevent access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. You must enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer using Epson iProjection to access the projector and share the current screen.

What does Display Keyword do?

You can select whether to display a projector keyword on the projected image when accessing the projector using Epson iProjection.

Note: Available when Projector Keyword is set to On.

What does Display LAN Info. do?

You can select the display format for the projector’s network information. By simply reading the QR code with Epson iProjection, you can connect the mobile device to the projector through a network. The default value is Text &QR Code.

What are the Connection Modes?

Quick You can connect to multiple smartphones, tablets, or computers directly using wireless communication. When you select this connection mode, the projector acts as an easy access point. (We recommend limiting the number of devices to six or less to maintain the projection performance.)
Advanced You can connect to multiple smartphones, tablets, or computers over a wireless network access point. The connection is established in infrastructure mode.

What does Search Access Point do?

You can search for available wireless network access points in Advanced connection mode. Depending on the access point settings, they may not be displayed in the list.

Notes

A blue mark appears for access points that have already been set
A lock icon appears for access points for which security has been set. If you select an access point for which security has been set, the Security menu is displayed. Select the type of security according to the security settings for the access point.

What does SSID do?

You can set the SSID (network name) of the wireless LAN system the projector is connecting to.

What are the Security options?

Open Security is not set.
WPA2-PSK Communication is performed using WPA2 security. Uses AES method for encryption. When establishing a connection from a computer to the projector, enter the value set in the passphrase.
WPA3-PSK Connects in WPA3 personal mode. Communication is performed using WPA3 security. Uses AES method for encryption. When establishing a connection from a computer to the projector, enter the value set in the passphrase.
WPA2/WPA3-PSK Gives images a natural tone. Ideal for watching films in a dark room.
WPA3-EAP Produces images that conform to the ITU-R BT.709.
WPA2/WPA3-EAP Produces images with clear shadows. Ideal for projecting X-ray photographs and other medical images. The projector is not a medical device and cannot be used for medical diagnosis.

Notes

WPA2-PSK is available only for Quick connection mode.
WPA3-PSK, WPA2/WPA3-PSK, WPA3-EAP, and WPA2/WPA3-EAP are available only for Advanced connection mode.
WPA is an encryption standard that improves the security for wireless networks. The projector supports TKIP and AES encryption methods. WPA also includes user authentication functions. WPA authentication provides two methods: using an authentication server,or authenticating between a computer and an access point without using a server. This projector supports the latter method, without a server.
When setting security, follow the instructions from the administrator of the network system you want to connect to.

What does Passphrase do?

For WPA2-PSK, WPA3-PSK, and WPA2/WPA3-PSK security, enter the pre-shared passphrase used on the network. You can enter various passphrases from 8 to 63 alphanumeric characters long. When the passphrase is entered and the Enter button is pressed, the value is set and displayed as an asterisk (*). We recommend changing the passphrase periodically for security.

Notes

You can enter up to 32 characters in the projector’s menu. To enter more than 32 characters, use your Web browser.
If you try to set Connection Mode to Quick when no passphrase has been set, a screen prompting you to set a passphrase is displayed.

What does EAP Method do?

You can set the EAP settings for WPA3-EAP and WPA2/WPA3-EAP security.

What does EAP Type do?

Select the protocol for authentication.

PEAP: Authentication protocol widely used in Windows Server.
EAP-TLS: Authentication protocol widely used to use a client certificate.

What does User name do?

Enter a user name for the network up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. To include a domain name, add it before the backslash and the user name (domain\username). When importing a client certificate, the name on the certificate is automatically set.

What does Password do?

Enter a password for authentication up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. After you enter the password and select Finish, the password is displayed as an asterisk (*).

What does Client Certificate do?

Import the client certificate.

What does Verify Server Certificate do?

You can verify the server certificate when a CA certificate has been set.

What does CA Certificate do?

Imports the CA certificate.

What does RADIUS Server Name do?

Enter the server name to verify up to 32 alphanumeric characters long.

Notes

You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters long in the projector menu.
To enter more than 32 characters, use your Web browser.
Password is only displayed when EAP Type is set to PEAP.
Client Certificate is only displayed when EAP Type is set to EAP-TLS.

What does Channel do?

Set the frequency band (channel) to use in Quick connection mode. If interference from other signals occurs, use a different channel.

What do the IP Settings do?

Set DHCP to On if your network assigns addresses automatically. Set to Off to manually enter the network’s IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address using 0 to 255 for each address field.

Do not use these addresses:

for the IP Address: 0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
for the Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through 254.255.255.255
for the Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x, or 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255)

What does SSID Display do?

You can select whether to display the SSID on the network standby screen and home screen.

What does IP Address Display do?

You can select whether to display the IP address on the network standby screen and Home screen.

What do the IPv6 Settings do?

You can select IPv6 settings when you connect the projector to the network using IPv6.

What does IPv6 do?

Set to On to connect the projector to the network using IPv6.

One local link address is always set while using IPv6. This is composed of the interface ID created from fe80:: and the projector’s MAC address. IPv6 is supported to monitor and control the projector over a network using Epson Web Control and PJLink.

What does Auto Configuration do?

Set to On to assign addresses automatically according to the Router Advertisement. The address is composed as shown below.

Stateless Address (0 to 6): Created automatically by combining the prefix acquired from the RA (Router Advertisement) and the interface ID created from the projector’s MAC address.
Stateful Address (0 to 1): Created automatically from the DHCP server using DHCPv6

What does Use Temporary Address do?

Set to On if you want to use a temporary IPv6 address.

Note: You can set the IPv6 address manually in the Advanced menu in Epson Web Control.

What does Mail Notification do?

Set to On to send an email to the preset addresses when a problem or warning occurs with a projector.

What does SMTP Server do?

Enter the IP address for the projector’s SMTP server using 0 to 255 for each address field. Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255 (where x is a number from 0 to 255).

What does Port Number do?

Enter a number for the SMTP server Port Number from 1 to 65535 (default is 25).

What does From do?

Enter the e-mail address of the sender up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use " ( ) , : ; < > [ ] spaces.)

Note: You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters long in the projector menu. To enter more than 32 characters, use your Web browser.

What do the Address 1/Address 2/Address 3 Setting do?

Enter the e-mail address to receive notifications up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. (Do not use " ( ) , : ; < > [ ] spaces.) Select the alerts you want to receive.

Note: You can enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters long in the projector menu. To enter more than 32 characters, use your Web browser.

How can I monitor the projector using SNMP?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Notifications > SNMP to On to monitor the projector using SNMP. To monitor the projector, you need to install the SNMP manager program on your computer. SNMP should be managed by a network administrator. You must set the Community Name when using the SNMP function for the first time.

What IP addresses should I enter to receive SNMP notifications?

Enter up to two IP addresses in Network > Network Configuration > Notifications > Trap IP Address 1 and Network > Network Configuration > Notifications > Trap IP Address 2 to receive SNMP notifications, using 0 to 255 for each address field.

Do not use these addresses:

127.x.x.x
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255).

What is the maximum length and allowable characters for the SNMP Community Name?

Enter the SNMP community name up to 32 alphanumeric characters long in Network > Network Configuration > Notifications > Community Name. Do not use spaces and any symbols other than @.

How do I enable the PJLink notification function?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Notifications > PJLink Notification to On to enable the PJLink notification function when the PJLink setting is enabled.

What is the maximum length and allowable characters for the sender’s email address?

Enter the e-mail address of the sender up to 64 alphanumeric characters long. Do not use " ( ) , : ; < > [ \ ] spaces.

What IP address do I enter to receive the projector’s operating status when the PJLink notification function is enabled?

Enter the IP address to receive the projector’s operating status when the PJLink notification function is enabled in Network > Network Configuration > Notifications > Notified IP Address.

Enter the addresses using 0 to 255 for each address field.

Do not use these addresses:

127.x.x.x
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255).

How can I select the authentication method for command communication?

You can select the authentication method for command communication in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Command Communication.

What are the authentication methods available for command communication?

Protected: Select when performing digest authentication using Web Control Password. You need to install the latest version of the Epson Projector Management software.
Compatible: Select when performing plain text authentication using the Monitor Password (up to 16 alphanumeric characters long). Select Compatible when monitoring projectors with a switcher and a system controller or using Epson Projector Management ver.5.30 or earlier.

How can I strengthen security for communication between the projector and computer in Web control?

To strengthen security, communication between the projector and computer in Web control is encrypted. When setting security with Web control, it is recommended to set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Secure HTTP to On.

How do I import the Web server certificate for secure HTTP?

The Web server certificate for secure HTTP is imported in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Web Server Certificate.

How do I enable the Web API function?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Web API Settings > Web API to On to enable the Web API function.

You must set a Web Control Password when using Web API communications for the first time.

What are the available security settings for my projector to use during Web API communications?

You can set the security for your projector to use during Web API communications in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Web API Settings > Authentication. The available settings are:

Open: Security is not set.
Digest: Communication is performed using API authentication (Digest authentication). See the Web API Specifications for Projectors for details.

Where can I set the priority gateway?

You can set the priority gateway in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Priority Gateway.

How can I control the projector remotely by using Basic Control?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Basic Control to On to control the projector remotely by using Basic Control.

You must set a Remote Password the first time you turn on this setting.

Note: Setting is only displayed when Content Playback is set to Off.

How can I monitor the projector using PJLink?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > PJLink to On to monitor the projector using PJLink. You must set the PJLink Password when using the PJLink function for the first time.

How can I allow the projector to be detected by AMX Device Discovery?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > AMX Device Discovery to On when you want to allow the projector to be detected by AMX Device Discovery.

When should I set Crestron Connected to On?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Crestron Connected to On only when monitoring or controlling the projector over the network using Crestron Connected.

If no password has been set, a screen prompting you to set a password is displayed before you can set Crestron Connected to On.

What is the maximum length and allowable characters for the Crestron Connected password?

Enter a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters long. Do not use * : spaces.

Restart the projector to enable your changes.

What happens when I enable Crestron Connected?

Enabling Crestron Connected disables the Epson Message Broadcasting feature in the Epson Projector Management software.

How do I monitor or control my projector and other devices over the network using the Crestron Xio Cloud service?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Crestron Xio Cloud to On to monitor or control your projector and other devices over the network using the Crestron Xio Cloud service.

How can I control the projector using Art-Net?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Art-Net to On when you want to control the projector using Art-Net.

What number should I enter for the projector’s Net?

Enter a number for the projector’s Net using 0 to 127 (default is 0) in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Art-Net > Net.

What number should I enter for the projector’s Sub-Net?

Enter a number for the projector’s Sub-Net using 0 to 15 (default is 0) in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Art-Net > Sub-Net.

What number should I enter for the projector’s Universe?

Enter a number for the projector’s Universe using 0 to 15 (default is 0) in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Art-Net > Universe.

What is the range for the start channel that handles Art-Net?

Enter the start channel that handles Art-Net using 1 to 495 (default is 1) in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Art-Net > Start Channel.

Where can I view the Art-Net channel information?

You can view the channel information in Network > Network Configuration > Others > Art-Net > Channel Information.

How do I control the projector using sACN?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > sACN to On when you want to control the projector using sACN.

What is the range for the number for the projector’s Universe when using sACN?

Enter a number for the projector’s Universe using 1 to 63999 (default is 1) in Network > Network Configuration > Others > sACN > Universe.

What is the range for the start channel that handles sACN?

Enter the start channel that handles sACN using 1 to 495 (default is 1) in Network > Network Configuration > Others > sACN > Start Channel.

Where can I view the sACN channel information?

You can view the channel information in Network > Network Configuration > Others > sACN > Channel Information.

How do I receive messages delivered by Epson Projector Management?

Set Network > Network Configuration > Others > Message Broadcasting to On to receive the message delivered by Epson Projector Management. See the online Epson Projector Management Operation Guide for details.

Note: Setting is only displayed when Crestron Connected is set to Off.

How do I reset all adjustment values on the Network menu to their default settings?

You can reset all adjustment values on the Network menu to their default settings, except for the Wireless Mode setting in Network > Network Configuration > Reset.

Attention: All of the passwords that have been set for the Network menu are also reset and you will need to set them again. To prevent the passwords from being reset by unauthorized users, set Network Protection to On in the Password Protection menu.

Where can I view information about the projector and version?

You can display information about the projector and version by viewing the Info menu. However, you cannot change any settings in the menu.

What information can I view in the Info menu?

You can view the following information in the Info menu:

Projector Info
Light Source Info
Version
Status Information
Voltage Warning Info
Temp Warning Info
Power On/Off History
Firmware Update
Export Batch Settings
Import Batch Settings

Where can I view the projector’s information?

You can view the projector’s information in Info > Projector Info.

What information is displayed in Projector Info?

The following information is displayed in Projector Info:

Operation Hours: Displays the number of hours the projector has been used since it was turned on. The cumulative use time is displayed as “0H” for the first 10 hours. When exceeding 10 hours, it is displayed as “10H” and “11H” in 1 hour units.
Source: Displays the name of the port to which the current input source is connected.
Input Signal: Displays the input signal setting of the current input source.
Resolution: Displays the resolution of the current input source.
Refresh Rate: Displays the refresh rate of the current input source.
Sync Info: Displays information about video signals that may be needed by a service technician.
Color Format: Displays the color format of the current input source.
Status: Displays information about projector problems that may be needed by a service technician.
Serial Number: Displays the projector’s serial number.
Lens Type: Displays the model number of the installed lens.
Event ID: Displays the Event ID number corresponding to a network problem; follow the link below to see the list of Event ID codes.
HDBaseT Signal Level: Displays the signal level of the HDBaseT transmitter; if the information is displayed in yellow, the signal level is weak.

What should I do if the Event ID option on the Info menu displays a code number?

If the Event ID option on the Info menu displays a code number, check the list of Event ID codes for the solution to the projector problem associated with the code.

What is Event ID code 0432?

Event ID code 0432 means the network software did not start.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0432?

Turn the projector off and then on again.

What is Event ID code 0435, 0433, and 0434?

Event ID code 0435, 0433: Cannot display the transferred images.
Event ID code 0434: Unstable network communication.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0435, 0433, and 0434?

Event ID code 0435, 0433: Restart the network software.
Event ID code 0434: Check the network communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to the network again.

What is Event ID code 0481, 0482, 0485, 0483, 04FE, 0479, and 04FF?

Event ID code 0481, 0482, 0485, 0483, 04FE, 0479, 04FF: The network software quit unexpectedly.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0481, 0482, 0485, 0483, 04FE, 0479, and 04FF?

Check the network communication status, then turn the projector off and then on again.

What is Event ID code 0891?

Event ID code 0891 means the projector cannot find an access point with the same SSID.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0891?

Set your computer, access point, and projector to the same SSID.

What is Event ID code 0892 and 0893?

Event ID code 0892: The WPA/WPA2/WPA3 authentication type does not match.
Event ID code 0893: The TKIP/AES encryption type does not match.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0892 and 0893?

Make sure the wireless network security settings are correct.

What is Event ID code 0894?

Event ID code 0894 means communication with an unauthorized access point was disconnected.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0894?

Contact your network administrator.

What is Event ID code 0898?

Event ID code 0898 means the projector failed to acquire DHCP address.

What is the solution for Event ID code 0898?

Make sure the DHCP server is operating correctly. If you are not using DHCP, turn off the DHCP setting in the Network menus.

What is Event ID code 0899?

Event ID code 0899 means other communication errors have occurred.

What is Event ID code 089A, 089B, 089C, and 089D?

Event ID code 089A: The EAP authentication type does not match the network.
Event ID code 089B: EAP server authentication failed.
Event ID code 089C: EAP client authentication failed.
Event ID code 089D: Key exchange failed.

What is the solution for Event ID code 089A, 089B, 089C, and 089D?

Check the wireless LAN security settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.

Where can I view the projector’s light source information?

You can view the projector’s light source information in Info > Light Source Info.

What information is displayed in Light Source Info?

The following information is displayed in Light Source Info:

Light Source Hours: Displays the number of operating hours for each of the projector’s Light Source Mode settings.
Estimated Remains: If the Constant Brightness setting is enabled, displays the remaining number of hours the projector can maintain constant brightness.

Where can I view the projector’s firmware information?

You can view the projector’s firmware information in Info > Version.

How can I view the projector’s basic status information?

You can view the projector’s basic status information by going to Info > Status Information. This will show you the following:

The projector’s operating status.
Input signal information.
Input digital signal information.
The signal status of the current output source.
Wired LAN settings.
Wireless LAN settings.
Operating time for the projector and light source.
The projector’s firmware version.

How can I view various voltage warnings?

You can view various voltage warnings by going to Info > Voltage Warning Info.

When you select Detail when a Warning or Error is displayed, you can check detailed logs for before and after the error was detected.

How can I view various high-temperature warnings?

You can view various high-temperature warnings by going to Info > Temp Warning Info.

When you select Detail when a Warning or Error is displayed, you can check detailed logs for before and after the error was detected.

How can I view the power on/off logs?

You can view the power on/off logs by going to Info > Power On/Off History.

How do I perform a firmware update of the projector?

To perform a firmware update of the projector, go to Info > Firmware Update and follow the on-screen instructions. You can use one of the following methods to update the firmware:

Connecting an empty USB flash drive directly to the projector’s USB-A port
Connecting a USB cable to the computer’s USB port and to the projector’s Service port

How can I export the projector’s menu settings?

You can export the projector’s menu settings by going to Info > Export Batch Settings. This allows you to copy the settings to other projectors of the same model by saving them to a USB flash drive or a computer.

How can I import the menu settings?

You can import the projector’s menu settings by going to Info > Import Batch Settings. This allows you to import menu settings that were saved to a USB flash drive or a computer.

How can I delete all memories saved in Memory, Lens Position, and Geometry Correction?

You can delete all memories saved in Memory, Lens Position, and Geometry Correction by going to Reset > Reset All Memories.

What is the Refresh Mode process?

The refresh mode process clears any projected afterimage and turns off the projector after a specified period of time.

How do I set a time period during which the projector displays the refresh image?

Go to Reset > Refresh Mode > Timer to set a time period during which the projector displays the refresh image.

How do I set the projector to display a message informing me that the projector is in refresh mode?

Go to Reset > Refresh Mode > Messages and set this to On to display a message informing you that the projector is in refresh mode.

How do I start the refresh mode process?

To start the refresh mode process to clear any projected afterimage and turn off the projector after a specified period of time, go to Reset > Refresh Mode > Start.

Press any button on the remote control to cancel this process.

How do I start light source calibration to optimize the color balance of the currently projected image?

Go to Reset > Light Source Calibration > Run Now to start light source calibration to optimize the color balance of the currently projected image.

You may not be able to start calibration if the projector’s environmental temperature is out of range. Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before starting calibration for the best results.

In what cases will Light Source Calibration not start?

Light Source Calibration does not start in the following cases:

If the projector is not used continuously for more than 20 minutes
If the surrounding temperature gets too high, and the brightness has been automatically dimmed
If you use the following functions, and the brightness of the light source declines to a specific level or lower:
- Dynamic Contrast
- Lights-Out Control
- A/V Mute
If Brightness Settings is set to 30% or less

How do I set the projector to perform light source calibration periodically every 100 hours of usage?

Go to Reset > Light Source Calibration > Run Periodically and set it to On to perform light source calibration periodically every 100 hours of usage.

When set to Off to maintain the projected image that has been adjusted using Multi-Projection, perform calibration using Run Now or set a Light Source Calibration event to perform it periodically on the Schedule Settings screen.

How do I view the date and time of the last light source calibration?

You can view the date and time of the last light source calibration by going to Reset > Light Source Calibration > Last Run.

How can I reset most of the projector settings to their default values?

You can reset most of the projector settings to their default values by going to Reset > Reset All Config.

Which settings can’t I reset with Reset All Config?

You cannot reset the following settings with Reset All Config:

Memory
Startup Screen *
Panel Alignment
Color Uniformity
User’s Logo *
Date & Time
Color Matching
Schedule Settings
Language
Network menu items other than Wireless Mode
NFC Settings *

*These settings are reset when you set User’s Logo Protection to Off.

How can I reset the setting values to the values I set or to their factory default values?

You can reset the setting values to the values you set or to their factory default values by going to Reset > Reset All (Factory Default).

How do I apply the values I set in the User Default Setting menu?

Go to Reset > Reset All (Factory Default) > Reset All (User Default) to apply the values you set in the User Default Setting menu.

How can I reset all of the projector settings to their default factory values?

Go to Reset > Reset All (Factory Default) > Reset All (Factory Default) to reset all of the projector settings to their default factory values.

If no password has been set, a screen prompting you to set a password is displayed before you can perform Reset All (Factory Default).

Which settings cannot be reset with Reset All (Factory Default)?

You cannot reset the following settings:

Light Source Info
Operation Hours
Password Protection
Schedule Settings*
Date & Time *

*This setting is reset when you set Schedule Protection to Off.

What should I do to prevent the passwords for the Network menu from being reset by unauthorized users?

Set Network Protection to On in the Password Protection menu to prevent the passwords for the Network menu from being reset by unauthorized users.

What can I do in the User Default Setting menu?

You can define the default value used when performing the Reset All (User Default) function in the User Default Setting menu. You can set the values for the following settings:

Color Mode
Light Source Mode
Brightness Level
Energy Saving Mode
Constant Brightness
Messages
Standby Confirmation
A/V Mute Timer
Beep
A/V Settings
Standby Mode
Sleep Mode
Language
Wireless Mode
DHCP (in the Wired LAN menu)
Command Communication

When do I need to set a password?

You can set a password when resetting values to the user default setting values or to their factory default values by going to Password Setting.

No password is set by default. You must set a password.

How can I temporarily turn off the projected picture and sound?

You can temporarily turn off the projected picture and sound by pressing the Shutter button on the remote control. This will stop projection and mute any sound. Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the point that you stopped it.

If you want to display an image such as a company logo or picture when the presentation is stopped, you can set up this feature using the projector’s menus.

To turn the picture and sound back on, press the Shutter button again.

What happens if the picture and sound are off for more than 2 hours?

If the picture and sound are off for more than 2 hours, the power automatically turns off. You can disable the A/V Mute Timer setting in the Extended menu to turn off this feature.

Can I add a fade out or fade in effect when turning the video on or off?

Yes, you can add a fade out or fade in effect when turning the video on or off by going to Extended > Operation > A/V Mute Settings.

How can I temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and keep the current image on the screen?

You can temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and keep the current image on the screen by pressing the Freeze button on the remote control. Any sound or video action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the point that you stopped it.

To restart the video action in progress, press Freeze again.

What happens when I press the Freeze button on the remote control?

When you press the Freeze button on the remote control, a screen is displayed asking if you want to capture the image currently being projected and use it as a test pattern. If you press the Enter button and capture the projected image as a test pattern during Freeze, you can use the captured image as one of the test patterns. While projecting the captured image, you can perform adjustments such as lens shift, focus, distortion, and geometry correction. The captured test pattern is available until you turn off the projector.

What security features does the projector have to deter theft or prevent unintended use?

You can secure your projector to deter theft or prevent unintended use by setting up the following security features:

Password security to prevent the projector from being turned on, and prevent changes to the startup screen and other settings
Button lock security to block operation of the projector using the buttons on the control panel or remote control
Security cabling to physically cable the projector in place

What types of password security can I set up using one shared password?

You can set up these types of password security using one shared password:

Power On Protection password ensures that the projector can only be used after entering a password, preventing unauthorized usage
User’s Logo Protection password prevents anyone from changing the custom screen the projector can display when it turns on. The presence of the custom screen discourages theft by identifying the projector’s owner
Network Protection password prevents anyone from changing the network settings in the projector menus
Schedule Protection password prevents anyone from changing the projector’s time or schedule settings
Remote Camera Access password prevents anyone from changing the projector’s Remote Camera Access settings in the Network menu

Are there additional security measures available for the Remote Camera Access feature?

Yes, additional security measures are available for the Remote Camera Access feature. Contact Epson for details.

How do I set a password?

To use password security, you must set a password.

No password is set by default. You must set a password.

Hold down the Freeze button on the remote control for about 5 seconds or until you see the menu.
Press the down arrow to select Password and press Enter. You see the prompt “Change the password?”.
Select Yes and press Enter.
Press and hold down the Num button on the remote control and use the numeric buttons to set a four-digit password. The password displays as **** as you enter it. Then you see the confirmation prompt.
Enter the password again. You see the message “Password accepted.”
Press Esc to return to the menu.
Make a note of the password and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.

How can unauthorized use of the projector be prevented?

To prevent unauthorized use of the projector, select Power On Protection, press Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

How can changes to the User’s Logo screen or related display settings be prevented?

To prevent changes to the User’s Logo screen or related display settings, select User’s Logo Protection, press Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

How can changes to network settings be prevented?

To prevent changes to network settings, select Network Protection, press Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

How can changes to the projector’s Remote Camera Access settings in the Network menu be prevented?

To prevent changes to the projector’s Remote Camera Access settings in the Network menu, select Remote Camera Access, press Enter, select On, press Enter again, and press Esc.

Why should the remote control be kept in a safe place?

The remote control should be kept in a safe place because if it is lost, the password required to use the projector will not be accessible.

When is a password prompt displayed?

If a password is set up and a Power On Protection password is enabled, a prompt to enter a password is displayed whenever the projector is turned on.

When is a password required to be set for the projector?

A password must be set for the first time the projector is used.

Is there a default password for the projector?

No password is set by default.

How long can the password be?

A four-digit password can be set.

How is the password set?

Hold down the Num button on the remote control and use the numeric buttons to set a password.

Is a password required to use the projector?

Yes, the correct password must be entered to use the projector.

How is the password entered on the projector?

Press and hold down the Num button on the remote control while entering the password using the numeric buttons. The password screen closes.
If the password is incorrect, several things may happen:
- A “wrong password” message is displayed and a prompt to try again is given. Enter the correct password to proceed.
- If the password is forgotten, make note of the Request Code: xxxxx number that appears on the screen and contact Epson Support.
- If an incorrect password is entered three times in succession, a message is displayed telling the user that the projector is locked. After the message is displayed for 5 minutes, the projector enters standby mode. Unplug the projector, plug in the power cord, and turn on the projector. A prompt to enter the password is displayed.
- If an incorrect password continues to be entered many times in succession, the projector displays a request code and a message to contact Epson Support. Do not attempt to enter the password again. When contacting Epson Support, provide the displayed request code and proof of ownership for assistance in unlocking the projector.

How can an image be saved and displayed as the User’s Logo?

Display the image to be projected as the User’s Logo.
Press the Menu button, select the Extended menu, and press Enter.
Select the User’s Logo setting and press Enter.
Select Start Setting and press Enter.
A prompt appears asking if the displayed image should be used as the user’s logo. Select Yes and press Enter.
A prompt appears again asking if the displayed image should be used as the user’s logo. Select Yes and press Enter. A completion message is displayed.
Press Esc to return to the Extended menu.
Select Display and press Enter.
Select when to display the User’s Logo screen:
- To display it whenever there is no input signal, select Display Background and set it to Logo.
- To display it whenever the projector is turned on, select Startup Screen and set it to On.
- To display it whenever the Shutter button is pressed, select A/V Mute and set it to Logo.

How can changes to the User’s Logo settings be prevented without first entering a password?

To prevent anyone from changing the User’s Logo settings without first entering a password, set a password and enable User’s Logo security.

What should be done if the User’s Logo Protection setting in the Password Protection setting menu is set to On before saving the user’s logo?

If the User’s Logo Protection setting in the Password Protection setting menu is set to On, set to Off before saving the user’s logo.

What should be kept in mind when copying menu settings from one projector to another using the batch setup feature?

When copying the menu settings from one projector to another using the batch setup feature, the user logo is also copied. Do not include any information in the user logo that you do not want to share between multiple projectors.

Can content protected by HDCP be saved?

No, content that is protected by HDCP cannot be saved.

When can the user’s logo be displayed if Content Playback is set to On?

When Content Playback is set to On, the user’s logo can only be displayed when the projector starts up.

What happens to adjustments for image shape and display range when User’s Logo is selected?

Adjustments for image shape and display range are temporarily canceled when User’s Logo is selected.

When is the User’s Logo setting unavailable?

This setting is unavailable when Test Pattern is set to Captured Image.

How can the buttons on the projector’s control panel be locked to prevent anyone from using the projector?

The buttons on the projector’s control panel can be locked by following these steps:

Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Lock Setting setting and press Enter.
Select one of the following lock types and press Enter:
- To lock all buttons, select Control Panel Lock > Full Lock.
- To lock all buttons except the power button, select Control Panel Lock > Partial Lock.
  - A message is displayed on the screen if any control panel buttons are pressed while this setting is enabled.
- To lock the zoom, focus, and lens shift settings, select Lens Lock.
  - The lock button on the control panel can also be pressed to display the Control Panel Lock screen.
A confirmation prompt will appear. Select Yes and press Enter.

Can the remote control be used to control the projector when the control panel buttons are locked?

Yes, the remote control can be used to control the projector when the control panel buttons are locked.

How can the projector’s buttons be unlocked if they have been locked?

If the projector’s buttons have been locked, hold the Enter button on the projector’s control panel for 7 seconds to unlock them. The Control Panel Lock setting can also be set to Off in the Settings menu.

How can the remote control buttons be unlocked if they have been locked?

If the remote control buttons have been locked, hold the Home button on the remote control for 5 seconds to unlock them.

How can some of the buttons on the remote control be locked?

To lock the remote control buttons related to lens operation, turn on the Lens Lock setting in the Settings menu. To lock the other remote control buttons shown, press and hold the Home button on the remote control for approximately 5 seconds. (To unlock the buttons, press and hold the Home button again for approximately 5 seconds.)

What can still be done if the remote control buttons have been locked?

If the remote control buttons have been locked, the Remote Receiver setting in the Settings menu can still be reset to the default settings.

How can a projected image be quickly optimized?

A projected image can be quickly optimized by selecting image adjustment settings and saving them as a preset to reuse later. The following settings can be saved in a preset:

Frame Interpolation
Super-resolution

How are image presets created?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Image menu and press Enter.
Select the Image Enhancement setting and press Enter.
Select the Image Preset Mode setting and press Enter.
Select one of the presets and press Enter.
- If a previously used preset is selected, the new adjustments overwrite the old ones.
Press Esc to return to the Image Enhancement menu.
Fine-tune the following settings:
- Frame Interpolation
- Super-resolution
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus. The currently selected Image Preset Mode will be updated with the current settings.

How can the projector’s Frame Interpolation feature be used to smooth fast-moving video?

The projector’s Frame Interpolation feature can be used to smooth fast-moving video by comparing consecutive image frames and inserting an intermediate image frame between them.

In what conditions can this feature not be used?

This feature cannot be used in any of the following conditions:

Edge Blending or Scale settings are turned on
Image Preset Mode setting is turned off

How is the Frame Interpolation setting used?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Frame Interpolation setting and press Enter.
Select the level of interpolation and press Enter.
When finished, press the Menu button.

What should be done if the resulting images contain noise?

If the resulting images contain noise, turn off the Frame Interpolation setting.

How do you adjust scaled resolution images (super-resolution)?

You can sharpen blurry, low-resolution images that had their resolution scaled up for projection using the Super-resolution setting. Note that the Image Preset Mode setting must be enabled to select this setting.

Turn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Image Enhancement setting and press Enter.
Select the Super-resolution setting and press Enter.
Adjust each of the following options as necessary:
- Fine Line: Adjust to enhance fine details such as hair and fabric patterns.
- Soft Focus Detail: Enhance the outline, background, and main parts of an image. Note: Higher values increase the intensity of the effect.
Press Menu or Esc to exit the menus.

How do you adjust the color convergence (panel alignment)?

You can use the Panel Alignment feature to manually adjust the color convergence (the alignment of the red and blue colors) in the projected image. Note: You can adjust only the red or blue color convergence. Green is the standard color panel and cannot be adjusted.

Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Display setting and press Enter.
Select the Panel Alignment setting and press Enter.
Select the Panel Alignment setting again and press Enter.
Select On and press Enter.
Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
Select the Select Color setting and choose one of the following:
- R to adjust the red color convergence.
- B to adjust the blue color convergence.
Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
Select the Pattern Color setting and press Enter.
Select the pattern you want to use and press Enter.
Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
Select Start Adjustments and press Enter.
First, select Shift the whole panel to adjust the entire panel and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to adjust the whole panel and press Enter.
Next, select Adjust the four corners to make finer adjustments and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons on the remote control to adjust the color alignment of the color you selected for the Select Color setting and press Enter.
When you are finished adjusting each corner of the screen, press Enter.
Do one of the following:
- If your projector needs additional panel alignment, select Select intersection and adjust and press Enter to continue making adjustments.
- If your projector’s panel alignment is now correct, select Exit and press Enter to return to the Panel Alignment menu.

How do you adjust the color tone (color uniformity)?

You can use the Color Uniformity feature to manually adjust the color tone balance in the projected image.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Display or Multi-Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Color Uniformity setting and press Enter.
Press Enter and select On.
Press Esc.
Select the Adjustment Level setting and press Enter. There are eight adjustment levels from white through gray, and you can adjust them individually.
Press the right and left arrow buttons to adjust the level, and press Esc.
Select the Start Adjustments setting and press Enter.
Select the area of the screen that you want to adjust and press Enter. Note: Adjust the outer areas first, then adjust the entire screen.
Select the color (Red, Green, or Blue) you want to adjust, and use the left arrow button to weaken the color tone and the right arrow button to strengthen the color tone.
Press Esc.
Repeat steps 10 and 11 for each area you want to adjust.
When you are finished, press the Menu button. Note: The color tone may not be uniform even after adjusting the color uniformity

How do you run light source calibration?

Light source calibration automatically adjusts any difference between the white balance and the brightness level of the light source. You should perform light source calibration every 100 hours of projector usage. You can also schedule automatic calibration or run the light source calibration manually using the menus. Automatic light source calibration may not start in the following conditions:

Within 20 minutes of turning on the projector.
When using direct power shutdown.
When you have used the projector continuously for over 24 hours.
When the brightness is automatically dimmed due to use of the Dynamic Contrast, A/V Mute, or Lights-Out Control features.

Note: To perform a light source calibration, the projector must have been on for at least 20 minutes and the projector brightness must not be automatically dimmed due to high temperatures.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Reset menu and press Enter.
Select Light Source Calibration and press Enter.
Select any of the following:
- To run the light source calibration now, select Run Now.
- To automatically run the light source calibration every 100 hours of projector usage, select Run Periodically.
- To schedule automatic calibration, select Schedule Settings.
- To see the last time the projector performed a calibration, select Last Run. Note: If you use the projector continuously for more than 24 hours or use direct shutdown regularly, select Schedule Settings to schedule calibration of the light source periodically.
When you are finished, select Return and press the Enter button to return to the Reset menu.

How do you use multiple projectors?

You can combine the projected images from two or more projectors to create one large image or overlap the images from multiple projectors to create a single bright image. Follow the instructions to set up and project from multiple projectors.

What is multiple projector adjustment overview?

If you are combining images from multiple projectors on a network, you can assign one projector as the “master” and automatically adjust all the images to match the “master” image. If the projectors are not connected to a network, you can match each projector’s images manually. Note: Make sure all networked projectors are connected using LAN cables and have been assigned an IP address. Also disable the Sleep Mode setting on each projector so they do not turn off during adjustment.

Turn on all the projectors.
Reset all projectors to their default values.
- Enable the Reset All Config setting.
- Reset the settings on the Color Uniformity menu to their default settings.
- Reset the settings on the Panel Alignment menu to their default settings.
- Set the Adjustment Level setting to All in the Color Matching menu, and select 0 for Red, Green, and Blue.
- Set the Sleep Mode setting to Off. Note: You can make the necessary settings using the Batch Setup feature and then copying the settings to multiple projectors.
Select one projector to be the basis for adjustment. Display test patterns from all projectors and select the one with the least color unevenness as the master projector. Note: We recommend using the Grayscale, Gray Bars V, Gray Bars H, and White test patterns.
Set an ID for each projector and the remote control. Set the remote control to the master projector ID in order to limit the remote control to that projector.
For each projector, do the following:
- Run light source calibration on each projector.
- If you have installed the optional camera, perform color calibration on each projector.
- If you do not have the optional camera, or color calibration failed, perform color uniformity on each projector.
- Set the Color Mode setting to Multi-Projection.
- Set the Energy Saving Mode setting to Off.
- Set the Dynamic Contrast setting to Off.
- Set the Light Source Mode setting to Custom. Note: We recommend that you turn off the Run Periodically setting in Light Source Calibration. The automatic calibration may change your color adjustments.
Install all projectors in an appropriate location. Caution: Do not stack projectors directly on top of each other. Note: Install the master projector in the central position, if possible, to reduce color unevenness in the center of the projected area.
Adjust each projector’s physical position and angle to the screen.

How do you adjust the position of the image for each projector?

Adjust the position of the image for each projector using lens shift. When adjusting the image height with vertical lens shift, adjust it by moving the image from the bottom to the top. If you adjust it from the top to the bottom, the image position may move down slightly after adjusting.

How do you adjust the zoom and focus for each projector?

Adjust the zoom and focus for each projector.

What should you note during adjustment?

Wait at least 20 minutes before adjusting the images.
Displaying the test pattern makes it easier to adjust the projection position and the shape. We recommend using the Grayscale, Gray Bars V, Gray Bars H, and White test patterns.
We recommend not using Geometry Correction because image quality may decline and if the correction value is too large, image calibration may be difficult.

How do you connect all projectors to the network hub?

Connect all projectors to the network hub with LAN cables.

How do you adjust the arrangement of the images to create one large image from up to 15 projectors?

Adjust the arrangement of the images to create one large image from up to 15 projectors (tiling).

How do you adjust the brightness and tint of the images?

Adjust the brightness and tint of the images using the Screen Matching setting.

How do you adjust small differences in the images?

Adjust small differences in the images using the Point Correction setting.

How do you select sections of the images?

Select sections of the images using the Scale setting.

How do you adjust the edges of the images?

Adjust the edges of the images using the Edge Blending and Black Level settings.

How do you create one bright image by overlaying images from multiple projectors?

You can create one bright image by overlaying images from multiple projectors. Use the Simple Stacking setting in the projector menu to overlay the images from two projectors, or you can use the Epson Projector Professional Tool to overlay up to six projectors.

How do you operate multiple projectors using one remote control?

You can operate multiple projectors using one remote control for more elaborate presentations. To do this, you assign an identification number to each projector and to the remote control. Then you can operate all the projectors at once or individually.

If you want to control multiple projectors from a remote control, how do you give each projector a unique ID?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Multi-Projection menu and press Enter.
Select Projector ID and press Enter.
Press the left or right arrow buttons on the remote control to select the identification number you want to use for the projector. Then select Set and press Enter.

Repeat these steps for all the other projectors you want to operate from one remote control.

If you don’t know the projector’s ID, how do you temporarily display it?

Press the ID button to temporarily display the projector’s ID on the screen.

The remote control’s ID is set to 0 by default so it can operate any compatible projector. If you want to set the remote control to operate only a particular projector, what do you need to do?

You need to set the remote control’s ID to match the projector’s ID.

How do you set the remote control’s ID to match the projector’s ID?

Turn on the projector you want the remote control to operate with exclusively.
Set the remote control ID switch to On.
Press and release the ID button. Within 5 seconds, use the numeric buttons to enter a number for the projector (for example, 1 for projector ID 1).

If you don’t know the projector’s ID, how do you temporarily display it?

Press the ID button to temporarily display the projector’s ID on the screen.

If the batteries are left out of the remote control for an extended period, what happens?

The remote control ID returns to its default setting.

How can you create a bright composite image and a large image from multiple projectors?

Choose an adjustment method for composing images based on your environment:

If you have installed the optional external camera and the Epson Projector Professional Tool software is available, you can automatically adjust the image by using the Camera Assist function of the Epson Projector Professional Tool software.
If you have not installed the optional external camera or the Epson Projector Professional Tool software is not available, you can manually adjust the image using the projector’s menu.

Where can you download the Epson Projector Professional Tool software and its manual?

You can download the Epson Projector Professional Tool software and its manual from the Epson support site.

When compositing projected images using the camera assist feature in the Epson Projector Professional Tool software, what functions support curved surfaces?

Screen Matching (convex surfaces are not supported)
Color Calibration
Blending
Stacking
Stacking & Blending

How do you create one large image from up to 15 projectors using the optional external camera and the Epson Projector Professional Tool software?

Start the Epson Projector Professional Tool software.
Create a group of projectors on the Layout/Monitoring tab.
Specify each projector’s position using Blending and Stacking Settings on the Edit Group screen.
Start the Geometry Assist – Blending Function wizard. When the wizard has finished, perform the following operations as necessary:
- Screen Matching to correct the tint and brightness of each projected image.
- Point Correction to adjust the gaps in the positions of the projected image.
- Scale to crop and/or scale portions of the image.

When the screen luminance is 40 lux or less, what projection sizes are recommended for each projector?

Up to 9.9 Klm: 50 to 200 inches
10 Klm to 14.9 Klm: 60 to 300 inches
15 Klm to 19.9 Klm: 70 to 350 inches
20 Klm to 24.9 Klm: 80 to 400 inches
25 Klm to 29.9 Klm: 90 to 450 inches
30 Klm: 100 to 500 inches

How long does screen matching take?

The required time for screen matching varies depending on the layout and number of projectors. It takes up to approximately 18 minutes.

How do you create one bright image by overlaying images from up to 6 projectors using the optional external camera and the Epson Projector Professional Tool software?

Start the Epson Projector Professional Tool software.
Create a group of projectors on the Layout/Monitoring tab.
Specify each projector’s position using Blending and Stacking Settings on the Edit Group screen.
Start the Geometry Correction Assist – Stacking Function wizard. When the wizard has finished, if there are any gaps in the pixels of the projected images, adjust the Point Correction setting manually.

When the screen luminance is 40 lux or less, what are the recommended projection sizes for each projector?

Up to 9.9 Klm: 50 to 200 inches
10 Klm to 14.9 Klm: 60 to 300 inches
15 Klm to 19.9 Klm: 70 to 350 inches
20 Klm to 24.9 Klm: 80 to 400 inches
25 Klm to 29.9 Klm: 90 to 450 inches
30 Klm: 100 to 500 inches

How long does it take to automatically configure stacking?

The required time to automatically configure stacking varies depending on the layout and number of projectors. It can take up to approximately 9 minutes.

How do you create a single large, bright, projected image by joining and overlapping the images of multiple projectors using the Geometry Assist – Stacking & Blending Function wizard?

Start the Epson Projector Professional Tool software.
Create a group of projectors that support Stacking & Blending on the Layout/Monitoring tab.
Select Blending and Stacking Settings on the Create Group screen.
Specify each projector’s position using Blending and Stacking Settings.
Start the Geometry Assist – Stacking & Blending Function wizard. When the wizard has finished, perform the following operations as necessary:
- Screen Matching to correct the tint and brightness of each projected image.
- Point Correction to adjust the gaps in the positions of the projected image.

What test patterns are recommended for display?

Gray Bars V, Gray Bars H, and White.

When the screen luminance is 40 lux or less, what projection sizes are recommended for each projector?

Up to 9.9 Klm: 50 to 200 inches
10 Klm to 14.9 Klm: 60 to 300 inches
15 Klm to 19.9 Klm: 70 to 350 inches
20 Klm to 24.9 Klm: 80 to 400 inches
25 Klm to 29.9 Klm: 90 to 450 inches
30 Klm: 100 to 500 inches

How do you project the same image from up to 15 projectors to create one large image using the Tiling feature?

Before tiling, make sure the displayed images from your projectors are rectangular, correctly sized, and focused.

Where can you download the Epson Projector Professional Tool?

You can also set up tiling using the Epson Projector Professional Tool. You can download the software from the Epson support website at epson.com/support (U.S.), epson.ca/support (Canada), or latin.epson.com/support (Latin America).

If your projectors are on a network and you have identified a primary projector, how can you configure tiling automatically?

Turn on the projector. Make sure nothing is blocking the built-in camera on the front of the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select Multi-Projection and press Enter.
Select Projector Grouping and press Enter.
Press the up or down arrow buttons to highlight a projector and press Enter to place a check mark next to each projector you want to use for tiling. Then select Set and press Enter.
Select Tiling and press Enter.
Select Tiling again and press Enter.
Select Auto and press Esc.
Select Location Setup and press Enter. The projected images are positioned automatically.
When you see the message to assign projector IDs, select Yes. When setup is complete, you see a screen like this:

If any of the images are not positioned correctly, what should you do?

Set up tiling manually instead.

What signal should you select to display an image?

Select the input signal to display an image.

After performing the automatic tiling setup, what should you adjust?

After performing the steps here, adjust the images for any gaps and differences in color.

What should you not change?

Do not change any of the projector names or IP addresses, or the images will not be adjusted automatically.

If your projectors are not on a network or you were unsuccessful tiling the images automatically, how can you configure tiling manually?

Turn on the projector.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
If you are combining images from multiple projectors on a network, select the Projector Grouping setting on the primary projector and create a group of projectors that you can control simultaneously.
Select Multi-Projection > Tiling > Layout.
Select the number of rows and columns you are setting up as the Row and Column settings. Then select Set and press Enter.
Repeat the previous steps with each projector you are setting up before continuing with the next step.
Select Location Setup and press Enter.
Select the position of each projected image as follows:
- Row Order to layout the screens from top to bottom in sequential order, starting with 1 at the top.

How do I tile images into one image?

Select the Tiling setting in the Multi-Projection menu and press Enter.
Select the Location Setup setting and press Enter.
Select Start Setup and press Enter.
Follow the on-screen instructions to adjust the location of the projected image.
Press Enter when the location is correct.
Repeat the previous step with each projector you are setting up before continuing with the next step.
Select the input signal to display an image. After performing the steps here, adjust the images for any gaps and differences in color.

How do I blend the image edges?

You can use the projector’s Edge Blending feature to create a seamless image from multiple projectors.

Note: Before performing Edge Blending, set the Color Mode setting to Multi-Projection to make more precise adjustments.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Multi-Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Edge Blending setting and press Enter.
Turn on the Edge Blending, Line Guide, and Pattern Guide settings.
Select the edge you want to blend on each projector and press Enter. For the projector on the left, select the Right Edge and for the projector on the right, select Left Edge.
Select the Blending setting and select On.
Press Esc to return to the previous screen.
Select the Blend Start Position setting and adjust the point where edge blending begins.
Select the Blend Range setting and use the arrow buttons to select the width of the blended area so that the displayed guides are at the edges of the overlapping area between the two images.
Press Esc to go back to the previous screen.
Select the Blend Curve setting and select a gradient for the shaded area on the projectors.
When the edges are blended, turn off the Line Guide and Pattern Guide settings on each projector to check the final settings.
When you are finished, press the Menu button. If the blended area does not overlap exactly, correct the shape of the blended area using Point Correction.

How do I adjust the black level?

When two images overlap, the overlapping area can appear differently from the areas that do not overlap. You can use the projector’s Black Level setting to make the difference less noticeable.

Note: You may not be able to adjust the black levels correctly if the Geometry Correction settings are set too high. The brightness and tone of the overlapping areas may differ from the rest of the image even after adjusting the black level. The Black Level feature is only available when the following conditions are met in the Edge Blending settings.

When Edge Blending is set to anything except for Off
When at least one of Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge, and Right Edge are set to On
You cannot adjust the Black Level setting when a test pattern is displayed
If you change one of Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Left Edge, and Right Edge, the Black Level setting returns to its default value.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Multi-Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Black Level setting and press Enter.
Select the Color Adjustment setting and press Enter. You see a screen based on the Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Right Edge, and Left Edge settings you selected for the Edge Blending setting.
Select the area you want to adjust and press Enter. Note: The area you selected is displayed in orange. Adjust overlapping areas starting with the brightest areas first. For example, adjust area 2 to match area 1, then adjust area 3 to match area 2.
Adjust the brightness and tone of the areas that do not overlap to match the areas that overlap using the displayed adjustment sliders.
Repeat the previous two steps as needed until all areas match.
If the tone of some areas do not match, you can adjust them using the Area Correction setting. Continue with the next step. Otherwise, press the Menu button to exit.
Press the Esc button to return to the Black Level screen.
Select the Area Correction setting and press Enter.
Select the Start Adjustments setting and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to select a boundary line and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the boundary line position and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to select an adjustment point and press Enter. The selected point turns orange.
Use the arrow buttons to move the point.
To move another point, press the Esc button and repeat the previous two steps.
To move another boundary line, press the Esc button repeatedly until you can select a boundary line.
When you are finished, press the Menu button. Note: Changing the Top Edge, Bottom Edge, Right Edge, or Left Edge settings resets the Black Level setting to its default value.

How do I match tint and brightness (screen matching)?

You can adjust the tint and brightness of multiple projectors so they match better. You can also schedule automatic adjustments to the tint and brightness. If your projectors are on a network, the brightness and tint for multiple projectors are corrected automatically based on the darkest projector. The time required for automatic adjustment depends on projector layout, and can take up to 18 minutes. The auto adjustment feature is only available under the following conditions:

When you set the position of each image using the Location Setup setting in the Tiling menu
When the Color Calibration setting is enabled
The optional lenses ELPLL08, ELPLX02S, or ELPLX02WS are not installed
You can only undo or redo the screen matching procedure if the Light Source Mode setting is set to Custom.

Note: Wait 20 minutes after turning on the projector before using the Screen Matching feature and darken the room for maximum accuracy. Brightness decreases over time, so you may need to perform Screen Matching again to correct large differences in brightness.

What are the screen matching conditions?

You can use the screen matching feature under the following conditions:

All of the projectors are the same model and the optional camera is installed on each projector.
You are projecting on a matte white diffusion screen that is flat and even.
The projectors are installed parallel to the screen.
Nothing is blocking the optional camera and the projected image.
More than 20 minutes have passed after turning on the projectors.
The projectors to be adjusted are grouped.
The projected images do not overlap or have gaps between them, and they create a rectangular image after tiling.
The projection size is within the following range according to the brightness of the light source (when the screen luminance is 40 lux or less):
- Up to 9.9 Klm: 50 to 200 inches (127 to 508 cm)
- 10 Klm: 60 to 300 inches (152 to 762 cm)
- 15 Klm to 19.9 Klm: 70 to 350 inches (178 to 889 cm)
- 20 Klm to 24.9 Klm: 80 to 400 inches (203 to 1016 cm)
- 25 Klm to 29.9 Klm: 90 to 450 inches (229 to 1143 cm)
- 30 Klm or more: 100 to 500 inches (254 to 1270 cm)
All of the projectors are connected to the same network and project images with the same resolution.
The Blend Range setting for edge blending is set between 15 to 45%.
The Projection setting for all projectors is set to Front or Front/Ceiling.

How do I match the screens manually?

You can manually correct the brightness and tint for multiple projectors.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Multi-Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Screen Matching setting and press Enter.
Select the Color Matching setting and press Enter.

How do I use the optional ceiling mount?

You can install the projector on a ceiling using an optional ceiling mount. When installing the projector, follow the instructions provided with the optional ceiling mount.

Caution:

Take care to secure the projector to the ceiling mount securely to prevent the projector from falling.
Securely tighten the screws on the ceiling mount. If the screws become loose, the projector may fall and cause injury.
Use only the ceiling mount designed for this projector. Other ceiling mounts may not be able to support the projector’s weight.
Have the installation performed by a qualified installer.

How do I install the projector on a table or stand?

Place the projector on a stable, level surface such as a table or stand. Make sure that the table or stand is sturdy enough to hold the projector’s weight. Make sure the surface is level and does not shake.
Adjust the tilt of the projector as necessary using the adjustable foot.
Check that the projector is stable and secure before using it.

How do I adjust the image size and focus?

Turn on the projector and allow it to warm up.
Move the projector towards or away from the screen until the image is the desired size. Note: You can also adjust the image size using the zoom ring on the projector lens.
Rotate the focus ring on the lens to focus the image.

Note: If you are using the optional ELPLX02WS short-throw lens, the image will automatically focus when you turn on the projector. If you are using the optional ELPLL08 ultra short-throw lens, you may need to adjust the focus using the Focus Adjustment buttons on the projector.

What should I know about positioning the projector?

When positioning the projector, be sure to consider the following:

The size of the image you want to project
The distance between the projector and the screen
The height of the projector
The angle of the projector

Note: The projector’s throw ratio determines the size of the image that can be projected at a given distance. The throw ratio is the ratio of the distance between the projector and the screen to the width of the projected image. For example, a projector with a throw ratio of 1.5:1 can project a 100-inch image from a distance of 150 inches.

How do I clean the projector lens?

Turn off the projector and unplug it from the power outlet.
Allow the projector to cool down completely.
Use a soft, dry cloth to gently wipe the lens. Note: Do not use any liquid cleaners or solvents on the lens. These can damage the lens coating.
If the lens is still dirty, you can use a lens cleaning solution. Apply a small amount of the solution to a soft cloth and gently wipe the lens.

Caution:

Do not touch the projector lens with your fingers.
Do not use excessive force when cleaning the lens.

How do I clean the projector cabinet?

Turn off the projector and unplug it from the power outlet.
Allow the projector to cool down completely.
Use a soft, dry cloth to wipe the projector cabinet.
If the cabinet is still dirty, you can use a mild detergent solution. Apply a small amount of the solution to a soft cloth and gently wipe the cabinet. Note: Be sure to wring out the cloth well before wiping the cabinet. Do not allow any liquid to drip into the projector.

Caution:

Do not use any abrasive cleaners or solvents on the projector cabinet. These can damage the finish.
Do not allow any liquid to drip into the projector.

How do I replace the lamp?

Caution:

Before replacing the lamp, be sure to turn off the projector and unplug it from the power outlet.
Allow the projector to cool down for at least 30 minutes before replacing the lamp. The lamp can be very hot and touching it could cause burns.
Do not look directly into the lamp beam.

How do I replace the air filter?

The projector’s air filter should be replaced periodically to ensure optimal performance. Refer to your user’s manual for the recommended replacement interval.

Turn off the projector and unplug it from the power outlet.
Allow the projector to cool down completely.
Open the air filter cover.
Remove the old air filter.
Insert the new air filter.
Close the air filter cover.

Note: Be sure to dispose of the old air filter properly.

How do I troubleshoot projector problems?

If you are experiencing problems with your projector, you can try the following troubleshooting tips:

Make sure the projector is plugged in and turned on.
Make sure the input source is properly connected to the projector.
Make sure the projector lens is clean.
Make sure the projector is not overheating.
Check the projector’s user manual for more troubleshooting tips.

How do I adjust the projected image?

You can adjust the following settings to optimize the projected image:

Brightness
Contrast
Color
Sharpness
Tint
Color Temperature
Gamma

You can also adjust the Geometry Correction settings to correct any distortion in the projected image.

How do I adjust the keystone?

Keystone refers to the distortion of the projected image that occurs when the projector is not perpendicular to the screen. You can adjust the keystone settings to correct this distortion.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Keystone setting and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the keystone settings.
When you are finished, press the Menu button.

How do I adjust the quick corner?

You can adjust the position of each corner of the image independently using the Quick Corner feature.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Quick Corner setting and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the position of each corner of the image.
When you are finished, press the Menu button.

How do I adjust the arc correction?

When projecting on a curved surface, you can use the Arc Correction feature to correct the curvature of the projected image.

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Arc Correction setting and press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the arc correction settings.
When you are finished, press the Menu button.

What are the functions of the control panel?

The projector’s control panel provides buttons for controlling the projector’s basic functions. The following table describes the functions of each button.

Button	Function
<p> Power</p>	Turns the projector on or off.
<p>Menu</p>	Displays the projector’s menu.
<p>Input</p>	Selects the input source.
<p>Esc</p>	Returns to the previous menu or closes the current menu.
<p>Enter</p>	Confirms the selected setting or option.
<p>Arrow buttons</p>	Navigates the projector’s menus and adjusts the settings.
<p>Lens Shift</p>	Adjusts the vertical and horizontal position of the projected image.
<p>Focus</p>	Adjusts the focus of the projected image.
<p>Zoom</p>	Adjusts the size of the projected image.
<p>A/V Mute</p>	Turns off the projector’s image and sound.
<p>Help</p>	Displays help information for the current menu or setting.
<p>Pattern</p>	Displays a test pattern for adjusting the projector’s settings.
<p>E-Zoom</p>	Enlarges a selected portion of the projected image.
<p>Page Up/Page Down</p>	Scrolls through the pages of a document or presentation.
<p>Number buttons</p>	Enter numbers when adjusting settings.
<p>Info</p>	Displays information about the projector’s current status.
<p>Auto</p>	Automatically adjusts the projector’s settings.
<p>Volume Up/Volume Down</p>	Adjusts the projector’s volume.
<p>Source Search</p>	Searches for available input sources.
<p>Direct Power On/Off</p>	Turns the projector on or off without pressing the Power button.
<p>Wireless On/Off</p>	Turns the projector’s wireless networking features on or off.
<p>My Button 1/My Button 2</p>	You can assign frequently used functions, such as switching input signals and adjusting image settings to the My Button 1 and My Button 2 buttons.
<p>Sleep Timer</p>	Sets the projector to turn off automatically after a specified amount of time.
<p>Screen Matching</p>	Adjusts the tint and brightness of multiple projectors so they match better.
<p>Color Mode</p>	Selects the color mode for the projected image.
<p>Aspect Ratio</p>	Selects the aspect ratio for the projected image.
<p>Image Enhancement</p>	Adjusts the image quality of the projected image.
<p>Noise Reduction</p>	Reduces the amount of noise in the projected image.
<p>Lamp Power</p>	Selects the lamp power mode.
<p>Network Configuration</p>	Configures the projector’s network settings.
<p>USB Display</p>	Projects images from a computer connected to the projector’s USB port.
<p>Remote Control Code</p>	Sets the remote control code for the projector.
<p>Language</p>	Selects the language for the projector’s menus and messages.
<p>Password</p>	Sets a password for the projector’s menu.
<p>Information</p>	Displays information about the projector, such as the model number, serial number, and firmware version.
<p>Reset</p>	Resets the projector to its factory default settings.
<p>Firmware Update</p>	Updates the projector’s firmware.
<p>HDMI Link</p>	Controls HDMI-connected devices using the projector’s remote control.
<p>Auto Input Search</p>	Automatically searches for an active input source.
<p>Test Pattern</p>	Displays a test pattern.
<p>Color Uniformity</p>	Adjusts the color uniformity of the projected image.
<p>Split Screen</p>	Displays two images side-by-side.
<p>PIP</p>	Displays a small image within a larger image.
<p>Multi-Projection</p>	Configures the projector for use in a multi-projection system.
<p>Edge Blending</p>	Blends the edges of images from multiple projectors.
<p>Black Level</p>	Adjusts the black level of the projected image.
<p>Screen Matching</p>	Matches the tint and brightness of multiple projectors.
<p>Color Calibration</p>	Calibrates the projector’s color settings.
<p>Location Setup</p>	Adjusts the location of the projected image in a multi-projection system.

What should I know about safety precautions?

Read these instructions carefully and keep them for later use. Follow all warnings and instructions in these instructions and on the projector.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners.
Do not use this product near water. For example, do not use it near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.
Slots and openings in the projector cabinet and in the back or bottom are provided for ventilation to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided.
Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock when the product is subsequently used.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions:
- When the power supply cord or plug is damaged
- If liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the product
- If the product has been exposed to rain or water
- If the product does not operate normally when the operating instructions are followed. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and often requires extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
- If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged
- If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance- this indicates a need for service.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch the plug with wet hands.
Avoid placing the projector in environments with the following characteristics:
- Extremely high or low temperatures.
- Excessive humidity or dust.
- Locations subject to constant vibration.
- Direct sunlight.
- Outdoors.
If the projector is dropped, check for damage and have it inspected by qualified service personnel before using it again.
Use the correct voltage. The projector is designed to work with a specific voltage. Check the projector label and use the correct voltage. Using the wrong voltage could damage the projector.
Do not overload electrical outlets or extension cords. Overloading could cause fire or electric shock.
Keep flammable materials away from the projector. Do not place the projector near curtains, drapes, or other flammable materials.
Do not block the ventilation openings. The projector needs air to circulate in order to prevent overheating. Blocking the ventilation openings could cause the projector to overheat and shut down.
Do not use the projector in a damp or wet location. Water and electricity are a dangerous combination.
Disconnect the power cord before moving the projector.
Do not look directly into the lens while the projector is in operation. The bright light can damage your eyes.
Do not touch the lens. The lens can get very hot during operation.
Allow the projector to cool down before moving it or storing it.
Do not place anything on top of the projector.
Do not leave the projector unattended while it is in operation.
Do not attempt to repair the projector yourself. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

How do I turn the projector on or off?

To turn the projector on, press the Power button. To turn the projector off, press the Power button again. The Power indicator lights green when the projector is turned on.

Note: After you turn off the projector, the cooling fan will continue to operate for a few minutes.

How do I select an input source?

You can select an input source using the Input button on the projector’s control panel or the Source button on the remote control.

Press the Input button or the Source button.
Use the arrow buttons to select the desired input source.
Press Enter.

How do I adjust the volume?

You can adjust the volume using the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons on the projector’s control panel or the remote control.

How do I adjust the image settings?

You can adjust the image settings using the projector’s on-screen menus.

Press the Menu button.
Use the arrow buttons to select the desired menu.
Press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to select the desired setting.
Press Enter.
Use the arrow buttons to adjust the setting.
Press Enter to confirm the setting.
Press Menu to exit the menu.

How do I use the remote control?

Point the remote control at the projector’s remote control sensor and press the desired button.

Note:

Make sure there are no obstacles between the remote control and the projector.
The remote control may not work properly if the projector’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light.
The remote control uses infrared signals. Other devices using infrared signals, such as certain types of lighting, may interfere with the remote control operation.

How do I use the My Button feature?

You can assign frequently used functions to the My Button 1 and My Button 2 buttons on the remote control. This lets you access the functions quickly and easily.

To assign a function to a My Button button:

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Option setting and press Enter.
Select the My Button Setting and press Enter.
Select the My Button button you want to assign the function to.
Select the desired function from the list.
Press the Menu button.

How do I connect to a network?

The projector has built-in wireless networking capabilities. You can connect the projector to a network using the following steps:

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Network setting and press Enter.
Select the Wireless setting and press Enter.
Select the Search setting and press Enter. The projector will search for available wireless networks.
Select the desired network from the list and press Enter.
Enter the network password, if necessary, and press Enter.
The projector will connect to the network.

Once the projector is connected to a network, you can access the following features:

Network Presentation: Project presentations from a computer on the network.
Network Monitoring: Monitor the projector’s status from a computer on the network.
Email Notifications: Receive email notifications about the projector’s status.
Firmware Updates: Update the projector’s firmware over the network.

How do I update the projector’s firmware?

You can update the projector’s firmware using a USB storage device or over the network. To update the firmware using a USB storage device, follow these steps:

Download the latest firmware from the Epson website.
Save the firmware file to a USB storage device.
Insert the USB storage device into the projector’s USB port.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Option setting and press Enter.
Select the Firmware Update setting and press Enter.
The projector will search for the firmware file on the USB storage device.
Select the firmware file and press Enter.
The projector will update the firmware.
When the firmware update is complete, the projector will restart.

To update the firmware over the network, follow these steps:

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Network setting and press Enter.
Select the Firmware Update setting and press Enter.
The projector will search for the latest firmware on the Epson website.
If a newer firmware version is available, the projector will download and install it.
When the firmware update is complete, the projector will restart.

Note: Do not turn off the projector or disconnect the power cord during the firmware update process.

How do I use the projector’s security features?

The projector has several security features that you can use to protect it from unauthorized use. These features include:

Password Protection: You can set a password to prevent unauthorized access to the projector’s menus.
Anti-theft Bar: The projector has a security bar slot that you can use to attach a security cable.

How do I dispose of the projector?

At the end of its service life, this product should not be disposed of with general household waste. Observe local regulations for separate collection of electrical and electronic products. Proper disposal and recycling helps prevent potential negative consequences to human health and the environment. Contact your dealer or local authorities for more information.

What other information should I know about the projector?

For the latest information on the projector, visit the Epson website.
Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of Seiko Epson Corporation or their respective owners.
Unauthorized copying or reproduction of any part of this manual is prohibited.
The contents of this manual and the specifications of the projector are subject to change without notice.
The projector and its accessories may differ in appearance from the illustrations in this manual.

What are the specifications of the projector?

Feature	Specification
Projection System	3LCD, 3-chip technology
Native Resolution	WUXGA (1920 x 1200)
Brightness	Up to 8,000 lumens
Contrast Ratio	Up to 2,500,000:1
Throw Ratio	1.37 – 2.24:1
Lens Shift	Vertical: ±67%, Horizontal: ±30%
Lamp Life	Up to 5,000 hours (Eco mode)
Inputs	HDMI x 2, VGA x 2, DisplayPort, USB-B, HDBaseT, LAN
Outputs	VGA, HDMI
Speaker	16 W monaural
Dimensions (W x D x H)	499 x 375 x 141 mm
Weight	8.2 kg
Warranty	3 years limited warranty on the projector, 1 year or 1,000 hours on the lamp

How do I adjust the color tone for the Red, Green, and Blue settings?

Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the color tone for the Red, Green, and Blue settings.

How do I adjust the Brightness setting?

Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the Brightness setting.

How do I project the same image from multiple projectors and use the Scale feature to crop and combine them into one large image?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Scale setting and press Enter.
Select one of the following as the Scale setting:
- Auto to automatically adjust the clipped areas according to the Edge Blending and Tiling settings you selected.
- Manual to adjust the clipped areas manually.
Select the Scale Mode setting and select one of these options:
- Zoom Display to maintain the image aspect ratio as you scale the image.
- Full Display to adjust the image to the projector’s screen size as you scale the image.
If you selected Auto as the Scale setting, you can skip the remaining steps. If you selected Manual, adjust each of the following options as necessary:
- Select – or + to scale the image horizontally and vertically at the same time.
- Select Scale Vertically to scale the image vertically only.
- Select Scale Horizontally to scale the image horizontally only.
Select the Clip Adjustment setting and use the arrow buttons to adjust the coordinates and size of each image as you view the screen.
Select the Clip Range setting to preview the area you just selected.
Press the Menu button to exit.

What are the conditions for using the simple blending feature?

All of the projectors are the same model and a built-in or optional camera is installed on each projector.
Wait for 2 minutes after turning on all of the projectors before starting the simple stacking process.
You are projecting on a matte white diffusion screen that is flat and even.
All of the projectors are installed parallel to the screen.
Nothing is blocking the optional camera and the projected image.

What is the projection size range based on the brightness of the light source?

When the screen luminance is 40 lux or less:

Up to 9.9 Klm: 50 to 200 inches (127 to 508 cm)
10 Klm: 60 to 300 inches (152 to 762 cm)
15 Klm to 19.9 Klm: 70 to 350 inches (178 to 889 cm)
20 Klm to 24.9 Klm: 80 to 400 inches (203 to 1016 cm)
25 Klm to 29.9 Klm: 90 to 450 inches (229 to 1143 cm)
30 Klm or more: 100 to 500 inches (254 to 1270 cm)

What should the Projection setting for all projectors be set to?

Front or Front/Ceiling.

What is the luminance ratio on the screen surface when projecting on an all-white screen and when projecting on an all-black screen?

8:1 or more.

How do I create a horizontally wide screen image projected from two projectors using the optional external camera?

Connect two projectors using a LAN cable.
Turn on the projectors.
Make sure the DHCP setting is turned on in the Network menu on both projectors.
- Wait for one minute after assigning an IP address automatically.
Select Extended > Multi-Projection > Simple Blending, and press Enter. Then press Enter again if necessary.
Select the Location Setup setting and specify the primary projector from A1 or B1.
Select the image aspect in the Whole Screen Aspect setting for the merged wide image.
- You can set the following aspects using the Whole Screen Aspect menu. Selectable items vary depending on the screen type setting.
  - 21:9 (EDID 3440×1440)
  - 21:9 (EDID 2560×1080)
  - 16:6 (EDID 2880×1080)
  - 16:6 (EDID 1920×720)
  - 3:1 (EDID 3240×1080)
  - 32:10 (EDID 3456×1080)
  - 32:9 (EDID 3200×900)
Perform Start Auto Adjustment. Follow the on-screen instructions to adjust the projection position. If the projection position cannot be adjusted fully using the Lens Shift button on the remote control or the Lens button on the control panel, move the projectors so that the green pattern and the magenta pattern overlap and turn white.
After auto adjustment is complete, perform Correct Shape following the instructions on the screen.
Perform Screen Matching to adjust the brightness and tint of the images.

What are the conditions for using the simple stacking feature?

All of the projectors are the same model and a built-in or optional camera is installed on each projector.
Wait for 2 minutes after turning on all of the projectors before starting the simple stacking process.
You are projecting on a matte white diffusion screen that is flat and even.
All of the projectors are installed parallel to the screen.
Do not stack projectors directly on top of each other.
Nothing is blocking the optional camera and the projected image.

How do I create a bright projected image by overlapping the images of two projectors using the projector menus?

You can overlap the images of up to six projectors when using the Epson Projector Professional Tool software and a built-in or optional camera.

Connect two projectors using a LAN cable.
Turn on the projectors.
Make sure the DHCP setting is turned on in the Network Configuration menu on all projectors.
Adjust the image position, shape, and focus on one of the projectors (this projector becomes the “master” projector).
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Multi-Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Simple Stacking setting and press Enter.
Do one of the following:
- Select Point Correction to divide the projected image into a grid and correct the distortion in increments. You can move the points on the grid between 0.5 to 600 pixels in any direction, including outside of the projection range.
- Select Start Auto Adjustment to automatically adjust the projected image using the camera assist functions.
  - This setting is only available if a built-in or optional camera is installed.
If your projector does not have a built-in camera or you have not installed an optional camera, adjust the Focus, Zoom, Lens Shift, and Geometry Correction settings manually.
Press the Menu button to exit.

How do I save customized settings?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Memory setting and press Enter.
- You can also access this screen by pressing the Memory button on the remote control.
Select one of the following options:
- Memory: Saves or loads various settings; you can save up to 10 different memories.
  - The following settings are saved: all settings from the Image menu, the Scale setting from the Signal menu, the Brightness Settings from the Settings menu, and the Edge Blending, Black Level, and Color Matching settings from the Extended menu.
- Lens Position: Saves or loads settings related to the lens such as the lens shift, focus, zoom, and distortion adjustment settings; you can save up to 10 different memories.
- Geometry Correction: Saves or loads any adjustments made in the Geometry Correction setting in the Settings menu; you can save up to 3 different memories.
Select one of the following options:
- Load Memory: Overwrites your current settings with saved settings.
- Save Memory: Saves your current settings to memory.
  - A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a blue mark. Saving over a previously saved memory overwrites the settings with your current settings.
- Erase Memory: Erases the selected memory settings.
- Rename Memory: Renames a saved memory.
- Reset Memory: Resets the name and settings of a saved memory.

How do I match tint and brightness?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Screen Matching setting and press Enter.
Select the Color Matching setting and press Enter.
Select the Adjustment Level setting and press Enter.
Press the left or right arrow buttons to select a value for the Adjustment Level setting.
- There are eight adjustment levels ranging from white to black and you can adjust each level individually.
Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the color tone for the Red, Green, and Blue settings.
Press the left or right arrow buttons to adjust the Brightness setting.
Repeat the previous three steps as necessary to adjust each adjustment level.
Press the Esc button to return to the previous screen.

How do I scale an image?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Scale setting and press Enter.
Select one of the following as the Scale setting:
- Auto to automatically adjust the clipped areas according to the Edge Blending and Tiling settings you selected.
- Manual to adjust the clipped areas manually.
Select the Scale Mode setting and select one of these options:
- Zoom Display to maintain the image aspect ratio as you scale the image.
- Full Display to adjust the image to the projector’s screen size as you scale the image.
If you selected Auto as the Scale setting, you can skip the remaining steps. If you selected Manual, adjust each of the following options as necessary:
- Select – or + to scale the image horizontally and vertically at the same time.
- Select Scale Vertically to scale the image vertically only.
- Select Scale Horizontally to scale the image horizontally only.
Select the Clip Adjustment setting and use the arrow buttons to adjust the coordinates and size of each image as you view the screen.
Select the Clip Range setting to preview the area you just selected.
Press the Menu button to exit.

How do I set up simple blending for one large image?

You can create a large projected image by tiling and blending the edges of the images from up to 15 projectors. You can also set up blending using the Epson Projector Professional Tool. You can download the software from the Epson support website.

How do I set up simple blending?

Connect two projectors using a LAN cable.
Turn on the projectors.
Make sure the DHCP setting is turned on in the Network menu on both projectors.
- Wait for one minute after assigning an IP address automatically.
Select Extended > Multi-Projection > Simple Blending, and press Enter. Then press Enter again if necessary.
Select the Location Setup setting and specify the primary projector from A1 or B1.
Select the image aspect in the Whole Screen Aspect setting for the merged wide image.
- You can set the following aspects using the Whole Screen Aspect menu. Selectable items vary depending on the screen type setting.
  - 21:9 (EDID 3440×1440)
  - 21:9 (EDID 2560×1080)
  - 16:6 (EDID 2880×1080)
  - 16:6 (EDID 1920×720)
  - 3:1 (EDID 3240×1080)
  - 32:10 (EDID 3456×1080)
  - 32:9 (EDID 3200×900)
Perform Start Auto Adjustment. Follow the on-screen instructions to adjust the projection position. If the projection position cannot be adjusted fully using the Lens Shift button on the remote control or the Lens button on the control panel, move the projectors so that the green pattern and the magenta pattern overlap and turn white.
After auto adjustment is complete, perform Correct Shape following the instructions on the screen.
Perform Screen Matching to adjust the brightness and tint of the images.

How do I set up simple stacking for one bright image?

You can create a bright projected image by overlapping the images of up to six projectors. You can stack two projectors using the projector menus, or up to six projectors using the Epson Projector Professional Tool. You can also set up stacking using the Epson Projector Professional Tool (version 1.31 or later). You can download the software from the Epson support website.

How do I set up simple stacking?

Connect two projectors using a LAN cable.
Turn on the projectors.
Make sure the DHCP setting is turned on in the Network Configuration menu on all projectors.
Adjust the image position, shape, and focus on one of the projectors (this projector becomes the “master” projector).
Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Multi-Projection setting and press Enter.
Select the Simple Stacking setting and press Enter.
Do one of the following:
- Select Point Correction to divide the projected image into a grid and correct the distortion in increments. You can move the points on the grid between 0.5 to 600 pixels in any direction, including outside of the projection range.
- Select Start Auto Adjustment to automatically adjust the projected image using the camera assist functions.
  - This setting is only available if a built-in or optional camera is installed.
If your projector does not have a built-in camera or you have not installed an optional camera, adjust the Focus, Zoom, Lens Shift, and Geometry Correction settings manually.
Press the Menu button to exit.

How do I save settings to memory and use saved settings?

Turn on the projector and display an image.
Press the Menu button.
Select the Settings menu and press Enter.
Select the Memory setting and press Enter.
- You can also access this screen by pressing the Memory button on the remote control.
Select one of the following options:
- Memory: Saves or loads various settings; you can save up to 10 different memories.
  - The following settings are saved: all settings from the Image menu, the Scale setting from the Signal menu, the Brightness Settings from the Settings menu, and the Edge Blending, Black Level, and Color Matching settings from the Extended menu.
- Lens Position: Saves or loads settings related to the lens such as the lens shift, focus, zoom, and distortion adjustment settings; you can save up to 10 different memories.
- Geometry Correction: Saves or loads any adjustments made in the Geometry Correction setting in the Settings menu; you can save up to 3 different memories.
Select one of the following options:
- Load Memory: Overwrites your current settings with saved settings.
- Save Memory: Saves your current settings to memory.
  - A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a blue mark. Saving over a previously saved memory overwrites the settings with your current settings.
- Erase Memory: Erases the selected memory settings.
- Rename Memory: Renames a saved memory.
- Reset Memory: Resets the name and settings of a saved memory.

How do you reset all saved memories?

To reset all saved memories of all types, select Reset All Memories in the Reset menu.

How do you save a scheduled event?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.
Select the Schedule or Extended Schedule menu and press Enter.
Select Add New and press Enter.
In the Event Settings section, select the events you want to have occur. (Select No Change for events that you do not want to occur.)
In the Date/Time Settings section, set the date and time for the scheduled events to occur.
When you are finished, select Save and press Enter.
To schedule more events, repeat the previous steps as necessary. You can schedule up to 30 events.
Select Setup complete and select Yes to save your changes.

Note: In the Extended Schedule menu, you can schedule only one event for Color Calibration or Screen Matching. Light Source Calibration events do not start if the projector is not used continuously for at least 20 minutes, or if the projector is regularly turned off by shutting off the power outlet. Set Light Source Calibration events to occur only after 100 hours of usage.

How do you view scheduled events?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Extended menu and press Enter.
Select the Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.

The colored boxes in the calendar indicate the following about the scheduled events:

One-time event
Recurring event
Communication is on/off
Event is invalid

How do you edit a scheduled event?

Press the Menu button.
Select the Schedule Settings setting and press Enter.
Press the left or right arrow buttons to highlight the date on the calendar containing the scheduled event you want to edit.
Press the up or down arrow buttons to highlight the event you want to edit, and press Esc.
Select one of the following:
- On/Disabled to enable or disable the selected event.
- Edit to edit the settings for the selected event.
- Clear to delete the selected event.
- Add New to add a new scheduled event.
When you are finished, select Return and press Enter.
Select Setup complete and select Yes to save your changes.

Note: To delete all scheduled events, select Schedule Reset and select Yes.

How do you copy menu settings between projectors?

After you select menu settings for your projector, you can transfer them to another projector of the same model. You can copy the projector’s settings before you adjust the projected image using the projector’s Geometry Correction settings. Any saved User’s Logo setting on the projector will transfer to the other projector. If the copy process fails due to a power failure, communication error, or for any other reason, Epson will not be responsible for any repair costs incurred.

Note: In addition to the methods covered in this section, you can also copy and transfer settings to multiple projectors over a network using the Epson Projector Management software. See the online Epson Projector Management Operation Guide for instructions. You can download the latest software and documentation from the Epson website.

How do you save settings to a USB flash drive?

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord from the projector’s power inlet.
Insert the flash drive into the USB-A port.
Press and hold the Esc button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power cord to the projector’s power inlet.
When the On/Standby, Status, Laser, and Temp lights turn on, release the Esc button. The lights flash to indicate that settings are transferring to the flash drive. When the lights stop flashing, the projector turns off.
Remove the flash drive.

Notes:

Use an empty flash drive. If the drive contains other files, the transfer may not complete correctly. The flash drive must use the FAT format and cannot have any security features.
Connect the flash drive directly to the projector. Do not use a hub or your settings may not be saved correctly.
The file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If you need to change the file name, add text after PJCONFDATA using only alphanumeric characters. If you change the PJCONFDATA section of the file name, the projector may not be able to recognize the file correctly.
Do not unplug the power cord or remove the flash drive while the light is flashing. This could damage the projector.

How do you transfer settings from a USB flash drive?

After saving projector settings to a USB flash drive, you can transfer them to another projector of the same model.

Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the projector’s indicators have turned off.
Insert the flash drive into the USB-A port.
Press and hold the Menu button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power cord to the projector’s power inlet.
When the On/Standby, Status, Laser, and Temp lights turn on, release the Menu button. The lights flash to indicate that settings are transferring to the projector. When the lights stop flashing, the projector turns off.
Remove the flash drive.

Notes:

Make sure the USB flash drive contains only a single settings transfer from another projector of the same model. The settings are contained in a file called pjconfdata.bin. If the drive contains other files, the transfer may not complete correctly.
Do not adjust image settings on a projector until after you transfer settings to it. Otherwise, you may have to repeat your adjustments.
Connect the flash drive directly to the projector. Do not use a hub or your settings may not be saved correctly.
Do not unplug the power cord or remove the flash drive while the light is flashing. This could damage the projector.

How do you save settings to a computer?

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord from the projector’s power inlet.
Connect a USB cable to your projector’s Service port.
Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.
Press and hold the Esc button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power cord to the projector’s power inlet.
When the On/Standby, Status, Laser, and Temp lights turn on, release the Esc button. The projector shows up as a removable disk on your computer.
Open the removable disk and copy the pjconfdata.bin file to your computer.
Once the file has copied, do one of the following:
- Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, Windows Explorer, or File Explorer utility. Right-click the name of your projector (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject.
- Mac: Drag the removable disk icon for your projector from the desktop into the trash. The projector turns off when you disconnect the USB cable.

Notes:

Your computer must be running one of the following operating systems:
- Windows 10 and later
- macOS 10.13.x or later
If the projector does not turn off and the lights continue flashing, see the link below for a solution.

How do you transfer settings from a computer?

After saving projector settings to a computer, you can transfer them to another projector of the same model.

Disconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the projector’s indicators have turned off.
Connect a USB cable to your projector’s Service port.
Connect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.
Press and hold the Menu button on the control panel or remote control as you connect the power cord to the projector’s power inlet.
The projector shows up as a removable disk on your computer.
Copy the pjconfdata.bin file from your computer to the removable disk.
Once the file has copied, do one of the following:
- Windows: Open the My Computer, Computer, Windows Explorer, or File Explorer utility. Right-click the name of your projector (listed as a removable disk) and select Eject.
- Mac: Drag the removable disk icon for your projector from the desktop into the trash.

Notes:

Your computer must be running one of the following operating systems:
- Windows 10
- Windows 11
- macOS 10.13.x or later
Do not adjust image settings on a projector until after you transfer settings to it. Otherwise, you may have to repeat your adjustments.
Do not copy any other files to the removable disk.
Do not unplug the power cord while the lights are flashing. This could damage the projector.

What maintenance does my projector need?

Your projector needs little maintenance to keep working at its best. You may need to clean the lens periodically, and clean the air filter and air vents to prevent the projector from overheating due to blocked ventilation. The only parts you should replace are the air filter and remote control batteries. If any other part needs replacing, contact Epson or an authorized Epson servicer. This projector uses a sealed laser light source which does not need servicing and cannot be replaced.

Warnings:

Before cleaning any part of the projector, turn it off, unplug the power cord, and let it cool down. Never open any cover on the projector, except as specifically explained in the manual. Dangerous electrical voltages in the projector can injure you severely.
Do not try to service this product yourself, except as specifically explained in the manual. Refer all other servicing to Epson qualified servicers.

How do you clean the lens?

Clean the projector’s lens periodically, or whenever you notice dust or smudges on the surface. Make sure you turn off the projector and unplug the power cord before cleaning the lens.

To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the lens with clean and dry lens-cleaning paper.
To remove stubborn smudges, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens cleaner and gently wipe the lens. Do not spray any liquid directly on the lens.

Warnings:

Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated by the projector may cause a fire.
Do not wipe the lens immediately after turning off the projector; otherwise, the lens could be damaged. Do not use glass cleaner or any harsh materials to clean the lens and do not subject the lens to any impacts; you may damage it. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a residue. Avoid touching the lens with your bare hands to prevent fingerprints on or damage to the lens surface.

How do you clean the projector case?

Before cleaning the projector case, turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

To remove dust or dirt, use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
To remove stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened with water and mild soap. Do not spray liquid directly on the projector.

Caution: Do not use wax, alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other chemicals to clean the projector case. These can damage the case. Do not use canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable residue.

Why is regular filter maintenance important?

Regular filter maintenance is important to maintaining your projector. Your Epson projector is designed with an easily accessible, user-replaceable filter to protect your projector and make regular maintenance simple. Filter maintenance intervals will depend on the environment. If regular maintenance is not performed, your Epson projector will notify you when the temperature inside the projector has reached a high level. Do not wait until this warning appears to maintain your projector filter as prolonged exposure to high temperatures may reduce the life of your projector or laser. Damage due to the failure to properly maintain the projector or its filter may not be covered by the projector’s Limited Warranty.

How do you clean the air filter?

Carefully remove the dust from the air filter cover with a vacuum or brush.
Loosen the screws and remove the air filter cover (it is attached with a tether).
Pull the air filter out of the projector.
Tap each side of the air filter 4 to 5 times to shake off any excess dust.
Vacuum the front of the air filter (the side with the tabs) to remove any remaining dust.
Vacuum the air intake vent to remove any remaining dust.
Place the air filter back in the projector.

When do you need to clean the projector’s air filter?

You need to clean the projector’s air filter in the following situations:

The filter or vents get dusty.
You see a message telling you to clean it.
The projector’s Filter light flashes orange.

How often is it recommended to clean the air filter?

It is recommended that you clean the air filter every 20,000 hours. Clean it more often if the projector is in a dusty environment.

What cautions should you take when cleaning the air filter?

Do not use excessive force when tapping the air filter, or it may crack and become unusable.
Do not rinse the air filter in water, or use any detergent or solvent to clean it.
Do not use canned air; the gases may leave a residue, or push dust and debris into the projector’s optics or other sensitive areas.

When do you need to replace the air filter?

You need to replace the air filter in the following situations:

After cleaning the air filter, you see a message telling you to clean or replace it
The air filter is torn or damaged

Can you replace the air filter while the projector is placed on a table?

Yes, you can replace the air filter while the projector is placed on a table.

How do you replace the air filter?

Turn off the projector and unplug the power cord.
Loosen the screws and remove the air filter cover (it is attached with a tether).
Pull the air filter out of the projector.
Place the new air filter in the projector.
Replace the air filter cover and tighten the screws.

What kind of batteries does the remote control use?

The remote control uses two AA manganese or alkaline batteries.

When should you replace the batteries?

Replace the batteries as soon as they run out.

What type of batteries should you use in the remote?

Use only the type of batteries specified in the PDF.

Should you install batteries of different types or mix new and old batteries?

No, do not install batteries of different types, or mix new and old batteries.

How do you replace the remote control batteries?

Remove the battery cover.
Remove the old batteries. 3. Insert the batteries with the + and – ends facing as shown.
Replace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

What should you do if the battery fluid has leaked?

If the battery fluid has leaked, wipe it away with a soft cloth and avoid getting the fluid on your hands. If it gets on your hands, wash them immediately to avoid injury.

What precautions should you take when inserting the batteries?

Make sure the batteries are inserted in the correct positions. If the batteries are not inserted correctly, they could explode or leak, causing a fire, injury, or damage to the product.

How do you dispose of used batteries?

Dispose of used batteries according to local regulations. Do not expose batteries to heat or flame. Keep batteries out of the reach of children; they are choking hazards and are very dangerous if swallowed.

What are the guidelines for transporting, shipping, or storing the projector safely?

The projector contains precision parts, some of which are glass. Follow these guidelines to transport, ship, or store the projector safely.

What cautions should you take when moving the projector?

Use two or more people to unpack or lift the projector. When moving the projector, do not hold the lens replacement cover or lens unit. They may become disconnected and the projector may fall, which could cause an injury.

How do you prepare the projector for transport?

Remove any equipment connected to the projector.
Remove the lens if it is installed. Place it in its original packing materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with cushioning around the product.
Attach the protective lens cover that was included with the projector.

How should you pack the projector for transport?

When transporting the projector a long distance or as checked luggage, pack it in a firm box with cushioning around it and mark the box “Fragile.”
When shipping the projector for repairs, place it in its original packing materials, if possible, or use equivalent materials with cushioning around the projector. Mark the box “Fragile.”

Is Epson liable for damages during transportation?

No, Epson shall not be liable for any damages incurred during transportation.

If the projector is not working properly, what should I do?

If the projector is not working properly, try turning it off and unplugging it. Then plug it back in and turn it on. If this does not solve the problem, check the following:

The lights on the projector may indicate what the problem is.
The projector’s Help system can display information about common problems, if the projector is operating.
The solutions in this PDF can help you solve many problems. If none of these solutions help, you can contact Epson for technical support.

How do I use the Help displays on the projector?

Turn on the projector.
Press the Home button on the remote control.
Press the arrow buttons to select Help.
Press Enter. You see the Help menu.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to highlight the problem you want to solve.
Press Enter to view the solutions.
When you are finished, do one of the following:
- To select another problem to solve, press Esc.
- To exit the help system, press Home. What should I do if no image appears?

If no image appears, try the following solutions:

Check the status lights to confirm the projector is operating normally.
Press the Shutter button on the remote control to see if the image was temporarily turned off.
Make sure all necessary cables are securely connected and the power is on for the projector and connected video sources.
Press the projector’s power button to wake it from standby or sleep mode. Also see if your connected computer is in sleep mode or displaying a blank screen saver.
Adjust the Brightness setting or select the Normal Power Consumption setting.
Adjust the brightness of your projector’s light source.
For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size from full screen mode.
For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off DirectX functions.
If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to display on an external monitor.

What should I do if the “No Signal” message appears?

If the “No Signal” message appears, try the following solutions:

Press the Source Search or Search button and wait a few seconds for an image to appear.
Turn on the connected computer or video source, and press its play button to begin your presentation, if necessary.
Check the connection from the projector to your video sources.
If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to display on an external monitor.
If necessary, turn the projector and the connected computer or video source off and then on again.
If you are projecting from an HDMI source, replace the HDMI cable with a shorter one.
Try a different video cable.

How do I display from a PC laptop?

If you see the “No Signal” message when you display from a PC laptop, you need to set up the laptop to display on an external monitor.

On Windows 7 or later, hold down the Windows key and press P at the same time, then click Duplicate.
If the same image is not displayed by the laptop and projector, check the Windows Display utility to make sure the external monitor port is enabled and extended desktop mode is disabled. (See your computer or Windows manual for instructions.)
If necessary, check your video card settings and set the multiple display option to Clone, Mirror, or Duplicate.

How do I display from a Mac laptop?

If you see the “No Signal” message when you display from a Mac laptop, you need to set up the laptop for mirrored display. (See your laptop manual for details.)

Open the System Preferences utility and select Displays, Display, or Color LCD.
Click the Arrange or Arrangement tab.
Select the Mirror Displays checkbox.

What should I do if the “Not Supported” message appears?

If the “Not Supported” message appears, try the following solutions:

Make sure the correct input signal is selected on the Signal menu.
Make sure the computer’s display resolution does not exceed the projector’s resolution and frequency limit. If necessary, select a different display resolution for your computer. (See your computer manual for details.)

What should I do if only a partial image appears?

If only a partial computer image appears, try the following solutions:

Make sure you selected the correct Screen Type setting in the projector’s Extended menu for the screen you are using. If there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected screen frame, use the Screen Position setting to adjust the position of the image.
Make sure the Scale setting in the Signal menu is turned off.
Make sure the Resolution setting in the Signal menu is set correctly for the input signal.
Try adjusting the image position using the Position setting in the Signal menu.
Check the Blanking setting in the Signal menu.
Check your computer display settings to disable dual display and set the resolution within the projector’s limits. (See your computer manual for details.)
Check the resolution assigned to your presentation files to see if they are created for a different resolution than you are projecting in. (See your software help for details.)
If you are projecting in Content Playback mode, make sure you are using the correct Overlay Effect setting in the Settings menu.

What should I do if the image is not rectangular?

If the projected image is not evenly rectangular, try the following solutions:

Place the projector directly in front of the center of the screen, facing it squarely, if possible.
Adjust the image shape using the H/V-Keystone menu setting.
Adjust the Quick Corner setting to correct the image shape.
Adjust the Curved Surface setting to adjust the corners and sides of an image projected on a curved surface.
Adjust the Corner Wall setting to correct the image shape projected on a curved surface with right angles.
Adjust the Point Correction setting to correct slight distortion that affects a portion of the screen.

What should I do if the image contains noise or static?

If the projected image seems to contain electronic interference (noise) or static, try the following solutions:

Check the cables connecting your computer or video source to the projector. They should be:
- Separated from the power cord to prevent interference
- Securely connected at both ends
- Not connected to an extension cable
Check the settings on the projector’s Signal menu to make sure they match the video source.
Select a computer video resolution and refresh rate that are compatible with the projector.
If you adjusted the image shape using the projector controls, try decreasing the Sharpness setting in the Picture menu to improve image quality.
Make sure the correct Video Range or EDID settings are selected in the Signal menu.
If you connected an extension power cable, try projecting without it to see if it caused interference in the signal.
When interlaced signals are input, line doubler processing is not performed,so the projected image may flicker. We recommend that interlaced signals be progressively converted using an external device before being input.

What should I do if the image is fuzzy or blurry?

If the projected image is fuzzy or blurry, try the following solutions:

Adjust the image focus. Make sure the projector has been on for at least 20 minutes before adjusting the focus.
Clean the projector lens.
- Note: To avoid condensation on the lens after bringing the projector in from a cold environment, let the projector warm up to room temperature before using it.
Position the projector close enough to the screen.
Position the projector so the keystone adjustment angle is not so wide that it distorts the image.
Adjust the Sharpness setting in the Image menu to improve image quality.

What should I do if the projector is too hot?

Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged with dust or obstructed by nearby objects
Clean or replace the air filter
Make sure the environmental temperature is not too hot

What should I do if the projector has overheated and turned off?

Leave the projector off for at least 5 minutes.

Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged with dust or obstructed by nearby objects
Clean or replace the air filter
Make sure the environmental temperature is not too hot
If operating the projector at high altitude, turn on High Altitude Mode
If the problem persists, unplug the projector and contact Epson for help

What should I do if there is low air flow through the projector?

Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.
Clean or replace the air filter.
If the problem persists, unplug the projector and contact Epson for help.

What should I do if there is low air flow through the air filter?

Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged with dust or obstructed by nearby objects
Clean or replace the air filter
If the problem persists, unplug the projector and contact Epson for help

What should I do if a message to clean or replace the air filter is displayed?

Turn the projector off, unplug it, and clean or replace the air filter as necessary.

How can I fix the image brightness or colors if they are incorrect?

Press the Color Mode button on the remote control to try different color modes for the image and environment.
Check your video source settings.
Adjust the available settings on the Image menu for the current input source, such as Brightness, Contrast, Tint, and/or Color Saturation.
Make sure you selected the correct RGBCMY setting in the Image menu.
Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID setting in the Signal I/O menu, if available for your video source.
Make sure all the cables are securely connected to the projector and your video device. If you connected long cables, try connecting shorter cables.
Make sure the Brightness Settings options in the Settings menu are set correctly.
Position the projector close enough to the screen.
When using multiple projectors, make sure Light Source Calibration in the Reset menu is set correctly in all of the projectors. If light source calibration is performed only in some of the projectors, the white balance and the brightness level of the projected image may differ between the projectors.

What can I do if an afterimage remains on the projected image?

Select Refresh Mode > Start in the Reset menu.

How can I fix issues with automatic adjustments not being applied correctly?

Be sure to wait at least 20 minutes after turning on the projector or turning off the Shutter setting before performing automatic adjustments. This gives the projector’s temperature a chance to stabilize.
Check that the camera area is clean.
Make sure the cable of the optional camera is securely connected to the projector.
If you think the optional camera is defective, contact Epson for help.
Depending on the lens you installed, automatic adjustments may not be available. Automatic adjustment is not available for the following lenses: ELPLL08.
If you are projecting from an analog input source, the changing color and brightness of the image may cause automatic adjustments to not be applied correctly.
Make sure that a powerful spotlight or source of strong natural light is not shining into the projection environment and interfering with automatic adjustments.
Check that your image correction and image blending settings are within reasonable ranges. If the projection angle is very large, try turning off the Geometry Correction setting or reduce the projection angle. If you are using the Edge Blending setting, make sure the blending width is between 15 to 43%.

What are the error codes that may appear during automatic adjustments, and what do they mean?

During Screen Matching:

0101: Measurement value error
0102: Measurement failure
0103: Switch camera failure
0104/0105: Model mismatch
0108: Camera error

During Color Matching:

0201: Measurement value error
0202: Measurement failure
0203: Switch camera failure
0208: Camera error

What should I do if I have problems with the simple stacking feature?

Make sure all of the projectors are the same model and they are all set to the same resolution and projection mode.
Make sure the projectors are placed squarely facing the screen and connected using a LAN cable.
Make sure the optional camera is installed correctly and the cable is securely connected to the projector.
Make sure nothing is blocking the optional camera and the projected image.
If you think the optional camera is defective, contact Epson for help.
Depending on the lens you installed, simple stacking may not be available. Simple stacking is not available for the following lenses: ELPLL08.
Make sure that a powerful spotlight or source of strong natural light is not shining into the projection environment and interfering with simple stacking.
Resize the projection size.
If you see an error message during simple stacking, make a note of the error codes and contact Epson for support.

What should I do if I have problems with the simple blending feature?

Make sure all of the projectors are the same model and they are all set to the same resolution and projection mode.
Make sure the projectors are placed squarely facing the screen and connected using a LAN cable.
Make sure the optional camera is installed correctly and the cable is securely connected to the projector.
Make sure nothing is blocking the optional camera and the projected image.
If you think the optional camera is defective, contact Epson for help.
Make sure that a powerful spotlight or source of strong natural light is not shining into the projection environment and interfering with simple stacking.
Resize the projection size.
If you see an error message during simple blending, make a note of the error codes and contact Epson for support.

What can I do if there is no sound, the volume is too low, or the volume is too high?

You must connect external speakers to the projector to hear sound.
Adjust the projector’s volume settings.
Press the Shutter button on the control panel or remote control to resume video and audio if they were temporarily stopped.
Check your computer or video source to make sure the volume is turned up and the audio output is set for the correct source.
Check the cable connection between the projector and your video source.
Check the audio cable connections between the projector and your video source.
If you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, set Sound Output Format to PCM in the Sound menu.
Make sure any connected audio cables are labeled “No Resistance.”
If you are using a Mac and you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, make sure your Mac supports audio through the HDMI port. If not, you need to connect an audio cable.
If you want to use a connected audio source when the projector is off, set the Standby Mode option to Communication On and make sure the A/V Settings options are set correctly.
If you want to use a connected audio source when the projector is off, set the Quick Startup option to Off and make sure the A/V Settings options are set correctly.
If the volume for the computer is set to the minimum while the projector’s volume is set to maximum, the sound level may be mixed. Turn up the computer’s volume and decrease the projector’s volume (when using Epson iProjection [Windows/Mac]).

What can I do if the projector does not come on when I press the power button or it shuts off unexpectedly?

Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the projector and to a working electrical outlet.
The projector’s buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons or use the remote control to turn on the projector.
If the projector’s laser shuts off unexpectedly, it may have entered standby mode after a period of inactivity. Press the power button to wake the projector and adjust the Sleep Mode setting to change the sleep interval.
If the projector’s light source turns off unexpectedly, the A/V mute timer may be enabled. Select Off as the A/V Mute Timer setting.
If the projector shuts off unexpectedly, it may have entered standby mode after a period of inactivity. Press the power button on the projector or remote control to wake the projector. After waking the projector, the Sleep Timer setting is automatically set to Off.
If the projector’s light source turns off unexpectedly, the shutter timer may be enabled. Select Off as the Shutter Timer setting.
If the power button on the remote control does not turn on the projector, check its batteries and make sure the Remote Receiver setting is turned on in the projector’s menu, if available.
The power cord may be defective. Try another power cord. If that doesn’t work, disconnect the cord and contact Epson.
The cooling fans may run in standby status depending on the projector settings. Also, when the projector wakes from standby status, the fans may cause an unexpected noise. This is not a malfunction.

What can I do if the projector does not respond to remote control commands?

Check that the remote control batteries are installed correctly and have power. If necessary, replace the batteries.
Make sure you are operating the remote control within the reception angle and range of the projector.
Make sure the projector is not warming up or shutting down.
Check to see if a button on the remote control is stuck down, causing it to enter sleep mode. Release the button to wake the remote control up.
If you enabled the remote control button lock, press and hold the Home button for about 5 seconds to turn it off.
Strong fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, or infrared device signals may be interfering with the projector’s remote receivers. Dim the lights or move the projector away from the sun or interfering equipment.
Make sure the optional remote control cable set is not attached to the projector’s Remote port. If you leave the cable connected to the port, the remote control cannot control the projector.
If you assigned an ID number to the remote control to operate multiple projectors, you may need to check or change the ID setting.
To set the remote control so it will operate any projector, set the remote ID switch to Off.
Make sure the Control Communications or Extron XTP setting in the Extended menu is set to Off if you are using the optional remote control cable set.
If you lose the remote control, you can purchase another from an Epson parts distributor.

What can I do if I cannot enter or remember a password?

You may have turned on password protection without first setting a password. Try entering 0000 using the remote control. If you lose the remote control, you cannot enter a password. Order a new one from Epson.
If you lose the remote control, you cannot enter a password. Order a new one from an Epson parts distributor.
If you have entered an incorrect password too many times and see a message displaying a request code, write down the code and contact Epson. Do not attempt to enter the password again. Provide the request code and proof of ownership for assistance in unlocking the projector.

What happens to passwords if I perform Reset All or Reset Network Settings in the projector’s menu?

If you perform Reset All or Reset Network Settings in the projector’s menu, all of the passwords that have been set for the Network menu are also reset and you need to set them again. To prevent the passwords from being reset by unauthorized users, set Network to On in the Menu Protection menu.

What should I do if I see a message telling me that the battery that saves my clock settings is running low?

Contact Epson for help.

What can I do if I cannot authenticate a wireless connection?

Check the Security settings and passphrase in the Network menu.
If the access point security is WPA3-EAP, change the access point setting to WPA2/WPA3-EAP.

What should I do if I am unable to access the projector through a web browser?

Make sure you are using the correct ID and password, which are case sensitive.

For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)
For the password, enter the password set in the projector’s Network menu. There is no default password.
Make sure you have access to the network the projector is on.
If your Web browser is set up to connect via a proxy server, the Epson Web Control screen cannot be displayed. Make settings for a connection without using a proxy server.
If you set Standby Mode to Communication On in the projector’s Extended menu, make sure the network device is turned on. After turning on the network device, turn on the projector.
Connect to a wired LAN, or to a wireless LAN with the Connection Mode setting set to Advanced.

What can I do if the projected image contains static during network projection?

Check for any obstacles between the access point, the computer, the mobile device, and the projector. If necessary, change their positions to improve communication. Also make sure that they are not too far apart; move them closer together and try to connect again.
If the wireless connection is slow or your projected image contains noise, check for interference from other equipment, such as a Bluetooth device or microwave. Move the interfering device farther away or expand your wireless bandwidth.
If the connection speed declines, reduce the number of connected devices.

What can I do if I do not receive an e-mail alerting me to problems with a projector over the network?

Make sure the projector is turned on and connected to the network correctly. (If an error shut down the projector, it cannot send an e-mail.)
Make sure you set up the projector e-mail alert settings correctly on the projector’s Network Notifications menu or in the network software.

What can I do if I cannot play back a playlist correctly?

Check the following on all projectors:

All projectors are the same model. If any of the projectors are a different model or have a different resolution, synchronized playback may not be performed properly.
Make sure the name, date, and time settings are correct.
Make sure all projectors are connected to the same network.
Make sure the Content Playback setting is turned on in the Settings menu.
Make sure your USB device contains a playlist.
Make sure your USB device is connected directly to the projector and not through a USB hub or card reader.
If the USB device is partitioned, you may not be able to play back playlists. Delete all of the partitions before saving the playlists on your USB device.
Do not share a playlist between projectors that are different in resolution. Color and shape effects added by using the Overlay Effect setting may not be reproduced correctly.

How can I get internet support for my projector in the U.S. and Canada?

Visit Epson’s support website at epson.com/support (U.S.) or epson.ca/support (Canada) and select your product for solutions to common problems with your projector. You can download utilities and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.

How can I speak to a support representative for my projector in the U.S. and Canada?

To use the Epson PrivateLine Support service, call (800) 637-7661. This service is available for the duration of your warranty period. You may also speak with a projector support specialist by dialing (562) 276-4394 (U.S.) or (905) 709-3839 (Canada). Support hours are Monday through Friday, 7 a.m. to 4 p.m., Pacific Time. Days and hours of support are subject to change without notice. Toll or long-distance charges may apply. Before you call, have the following information ready:

Product name
Product serial number (located on the bottom or rear of the projector, or in the menu system)
Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
Computer or video configuration
Description of the problem

How can I purchase supplies and accessories for my projector in the U.S. and Canada?

How can I get internet support for my projector in Latin America?

Visit Epson’s support website at latin.epson.com/support and select your product for solutions to common problems with your projector. You can download utilities and documentation, get FAQs and troubleshooting advice, or e-mail Epson with your questions.

What information do I need before calling for support in Latin America?

Before you call for support, please have the following information ready:

Product name
Product serial number (located on the bottom or rear of the projector, or in the menu system)
Proof of purchase (such as a store receipt) and date of purchase
Computer or video configuration
Description of the problem

What are the support telephone numbers for Latin America?

Country	Telephone
Argentina	(54 11) 5167-0300
	0800-288-37766
Bolivia*	800-100-116
Brazil	0800-007-5000
Chile	(56 2) 2484-3400
Colombia	Bogota: (57 1) 602-4751
	Other cities: 01-8000-915235
Costa Rica	800-377-6627
Dominican Rep*	1-888-760-0068

How can I purchase optional accessories and replacement parts?

You can purchase optional accessories and replacement parts from an Epson authorized reseller. To find the nearest reseller, go to latin.epson.com. Or you can contact your nearest sales office.

What is the type of display?

Poly-silicon TFT active matrix.

What is the screen resolution?

8,294,400 dots ( 1920 × 1080 × 4)

How many pixels does it have?

Full HD (1920 [L] × 1080 [H] dots × 4

What type of lens is supported?

Optional lens supported. Standard lens: ELPLM15 (not included)

What is the color reproduction?

Full color, up to 1.07 billion colors (depends on the interface).

What is the brightness (Color mode: Dynamic, Zoom: Wide, Lens shift: V Center / H Center) for the EB-PQ2008W/EB-PQ2008B in Normal Light Source Mode?

White light output: 8000 lumens
Color light output: 8000 lumens

What is the brightness (Color mode: Dynamic, Zoom: Wide, Lens shift: V Center / H Center) for the EB-PQ2008W/EB-PQ2008B in Quiet or Extended Light Source Mode?

White light output: 5600 lumens

What is the brightness (Color mode: Dynamic, Zoom: Wide, Lens shift: V Center / H Center) for the EB-PQ2010W/EB-PQ2010B in Normal Light Source Mode?

White light output: 10000 lumens
Color light output: 10000 lumens

What is the brightness (Color mode: Dynamic, Zoom: Wide, Lens shift: V Center / H Center) for the EB-PQ2010W/EB-PQ2010B in Quiet or Extended Light Source Mode?

White light output: 7000 lumens

What is the contrast ratio?

5,000,000:1 exceeded (Dynamic Contrast Normal/High Speed)

What are the projection distances (in native aspect ratio)?

Zoom (Wide): 77.9 inches to 1346 inches (1.99 m to 34.19 m)
Zoom (Tele): 128.3 inches to 2190.1 inches (3.42 m to 55.28 m)

What are the projection methods?

Front, rear, ceiling-mounted

What is the optical aspect ratio (width-to-height)?

Supports 4:3, 16:10, 16.9*, 21:9* * With vertical image shift control within letterbox area.

What is the focus adjustment?

Powered

What is the zoom adjustment?

1.0 to 1.6 (Optical)

What is the zoom ratio?

1 to 1.6

What are the noise levels for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W?

Light Source Mode Normal: 35 dB
Light Source Mode Quiet: 29 dB

What are the noise levels for the EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

Light Source Mode Normal: 35 dB
Light Source Mode Quiet: 29 dB

What is the keystone correction angle?

± 45° vertical (Tele Zoom)
± 30° horizontal (Tele Zoom)

What is the USB Type B port compatibility?

USB 2.0 compliant for firmware update or copying menu settings

What is the USB Type A port compatibility?

1 USB 2.0 compliant port for firmware update, Content Playback, optional document camera, streaming media player power supply (5V/2A), or copying menu settings
1 USB 2.0 compliant port for wireless LAN, firmware update, Content Playback, 5V/0.9A power supply, or copying menu settings

What is the light source type?

Laser Diode

What is the light source output power for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008B?

Up to 388 W (97 W × 4)

What is the light source output power for the EB-PQ2010W/EB-PQ2010B?

Up to 488 W (122 W × 4)

What is the wavelength?

449 to 461 nm

What is the light source life for Normal or Quiet Light Source Mode?

Up to about 20000 hours

What is the light source life for Extended Light Source Mode?

Up to about 30000 hours

How can I prolong the projector’s life?

Turn off this product when not in use to prolong the life of the projector.

What is the reception range?

98.4 feet (30 m)

What types of batteries are required?

Two alkaline or manganese AA

What is the height (excluding feet) of the projector?

6.5 inches (164 mm)

What is the width of the projector?

21.4 inches (545 mm)

What is the depth of the projector?

17.2 inches (436mm)

What is the weight (without lens) of the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W?

Approximately 40.6 lbs (18.4 kg)

What is the weight (without lens) of the EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

Approximately 40 lbs (18.6 kg)

What is the rated frequency?

50/60 Hz

What is the power supply for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W?

100 – 240 V AC ±10% 5.3 to 2.4 A

What is the power supply for the EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

100 – 240 V AC ±10% 6.5 to 2.9 A

What is the power consumption (100 to 120 V) for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W?

Normal/Custom Light Source Mode: 522W
Quiet/Extended Light Source Mode: 424 W
Standby: 0.5 W (Communication Off), 2.0 W (Communication On)

What is the power consumption (100 to 120 V) for the EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

Normal/Custom Light Source Mode: 640 W
Quiet/Extended Light Source Mode: 501 W
Standby: 0.5 W (Communication Off), 2.0 W (Communication On)

What is the power consumption (220 to 240 V) for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W?

Normal/Custom Light Source Mode: 502 W
Quiet/Extended Light Source Mode: 410 W
Standby: 0.5 W (Communication Off), 2.0 W (Communication On)

What is the power consumption (220 to 240 V) for the EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

Normal/Custom Light Source Mode: 613 W
Quiet/Extended Light Source Mode: 483 W
Standby: 0.5 W (Communication Off), 2.0 W (Communication On)

When should I turn on High Altitude Mode?

Turn High Altitude Mode on when operating the projector above 4921 feet (1500 m).

What are the operating temperatures when using a single projector?

Up to 7500 feet (2286 m): 32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C)
7500 to 10000 feet (2286 to 3048 m): 32 to 113 °F (0 to 45 °C)

What are the operating temperatures when using multiple projectors?

Up to 7500 feet (2286 m): 32 to 113 °F (0 to 45 °C)
7500 to 10000 feet (2286 to 3048 m): 32 to 104 °F (0 to 40 °C)

What are the storage temperatures?

14 to 140 °F (–10 to 60 °C)

What is the operating humidity (relative, non-condensing)?

20 to 80%

What is the storage humidity (relative, non-condensing)?

10 to 90%

What is the operating altitude?

Up to 10000 feet (3048 m)

What are the United States safety and approval specifications for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W/EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

FCC Part 15 Class B
UL62368-1 2nd edition (cTUVus Mark)

What are the Canada safety and approval specifications for the EB-PQ2008B/EB-PQ2008W/EB-PQ2010B/EB-PQ2010W?

ICES-003 Class B
CSA C22.2 No.62368-1-14 (cTUVus Mark)

What is Epson’s recycling program?

Epson offers a recycling program for end of life products. Please go to this site for information on how to return your products for proper disposal.

What are some safety warnings?

Never look into the projector lens when the light source is on. This can damage your eyes and is especially dangerous for children.
During projection, do not block the light from the projector with a book or other objects. If the light from the projector is blocked, the area on which the light shines becomes hot which could cause it to melt, burn, or start a fire. Also, the lens may get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the projector to malfunction.
Before cleaning any part of the projector, turn it off and unplug the power cord. Never open any cover on the projector, except as specifically explained in this manual. Dangerous electrical voltages in the projector can injure you severely.
The projector and its accessories come packaged in plastic bags. Keep plastic bags away from small children to avoid any risk of suffocation.

Where should I avoid installing the projector?

Do not install the projector in locations exposed to high humidity and dust, such as on a kitchen counter, in the kitchen, or near a humidifier, or in locations exposed to oil smoke or steam. Doing so could cause fire or electric shock. The projector’s case could also deteriorate and be damaged causing the projector to fall from the mount.

What are examples of environments that could cause the projector to fall due to case deterioration?

Locations subject to excessive smoke or airborne oil particles, such as factories or kitchens
Locations containing volatile solvents or chemicals, such as factories or laboratories
Locations where the projector could be subjected to detergents or chemicals, such as factories or kitchens
Locations in which aroma oils are often used, such as relaxation rooms
Near devices that produce excessive smoke, airborne oil particles, or foam at events

Where should the projector not be installed?

Do not install the projector in a location that does not allow air to circulate, such as on a shelf or in a box.

What should I do if an error occurs in the projector?

If an error occurs in the projector, turn off the power and unplug the projector immediately. Continuing to use the projector could result in an electric shock, fire, or visual impairment. Contact Epson support.

What could happen if I use controls, make adjustments, or perform procedures other than those specified?

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

What are some important safety instructions to follow regarding the projector and its accessories?

The projector and its accessories come packaged in plastic bags. Keep plastic bags away from small children to avoid any risk of suffocation.
Do not look into the lens when the projector is on. The bright light can damage your eyes. Avoid standing in front of the projector so the bright light does not shine into your eyes.
Possibly hazardous optical radiation emitted from this product. Do not direct or reflect the laser light toward people or reflective objects. Do not look at the operating light source or expose your skin to it. Eye and/or skin injury may result if these instructions are not followed.
Do not look into the lens using optical devices, such as a magnifying glass or telescope. This could cause visual impairment.

Why shouldn’t optical devices be applied to the projected image?

Do not apply optical devices, such as a magnifying glass or reflector, to the projected image. Using the projector in this way may result in physical harm, fire, or an accident.

What precautions should I take when turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control?

When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make sure no one is looking into the lens.

Where should the projector not be placed?

Do not place the projector where the cord can be walked on. This may result in fraying or damage to the plug.
Do not operate the projector in a closed-in cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided.
Do not block the slots and openings in the projector case. They provide ventilation and prevent the projector from overheating. Do not operate the projector on a sofa, rug, or other soft surface, or set it on top of loose papers. Do not cover the projector with a blanket, curtain, or tablecloth. If you are setting up the projector near a wall, leave at least 7.9 inches (20 cm) of space between the wall and the projector.

Should small children operate the projector?

Do not allow small children to operate the projector. Children must be accompanied by an adult.

What should I check before using the projector?

Before using the projector, make sure there is nothing in the area that could reflect the projected image.

Who should install a ceiling or wall mounted projector?

If the projector is mounted on a ceiling or wall, it should be installed by qualified technicians using mounting hardware designed for use with this projector.

What should I avoid using when installing or adjusting a ceiling or wall mount?

When installing or adjusting a ceiling or wall mount, do not use adhesives to prevent the screws from loosening and do not use oils or lubricants. This may cause the projector case to crack and the projector to fall from its ceiling mount. This could cause serious injury to anyone under the mount and could damage the projector.

Where should the projector not be used?

Do not use the projector near water, sources of heat, high-voltage electrical wires, or sources of magnetic fields.

What type of power source should I use?

Use the type of power source indicated on the projector. Use of a different power source may result in fire or electric shock. If you are not sure of the power available, consult your dealer or power company.

Where should I place the projector?

Place the projector near a wall outlet where the plug can be easily unplugged.

What precautions should I take when handling the plug?

Do not hold the plug with wet hands.
Do not insert the plug into a dusty outlet.
Insert the plug firmly into the outlet.
Do not pull the power cord when disconnecting the plug; always be sure to hold the plug when disconnecting it.
Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or power strips. Failure to comply with these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.

What should never be allowed to enter the projector?

Never allow objects of any kind to enter any openings in the projector.
Do not leave objects, especially flammable objects, near the projector.
Never spill liquid of any kind into the projector.

Should I disassemble or modify the projector?

Never open any covers on the projector except as specifically explained in this manual.
Never attempt to disassemble or modify the projector. Refer all repairs to qualified service personnel.

When should I have the projector serviced by a qualified person?

Unplug the projector from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel if it does not operate normally when you follow the operating instructions, or exhibits a distinct change in performance; if smoke, strange odors, or strange noises come from the projector; if the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed; if liquid or foreign objects get inside the projector, or if it has been exposed to rain or water; if it has been dropped or the housing has been damaged.

What safety precautions should I take during an electrical storm?

Do not touch the plug during an electrical storm. Otherwise, you may receive an electric shock.

Where should I avoid using the projector?

Do not use the projector where it may be exposed to rain, water, or excessive humidity. Do not use the projector where flammable or explosive gases may be present. Do not use or store the projector or remote control in a hot location, such as near a heater, in direct sunlight, or in a closed vehicle.

What precautions should I take regarding open flames and the projector?

Do not place the source of an open flame, such as a lit candle, on or near the projector.

Why shouldn’t I block the lens during projection?

Do not block the lens during projection using a book or any other object. This could damage the projector or cause a fire.

What are the safety guidelines for handling the projector’s power cord?

Do not modify the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on top of the power cord or bend, twist, or pull it excessively. Keep the power cord away from hot electrical appliances.

When should I attach the lens cover to the lens?

Always attach the lens cover to the lens when not using the projector to prevent the lens from becoming dirty or damaged.

What should I do if I use the projector in a different country?

If you use the projector in a country other than where you purchased it, use the correct power cord for that country.

What precautions should I take to avoid damaging the projector physically?

Do not stand on the projector or place heavy objects on it.

What is the recommended temperature range for using and storing the projector?

Do not use the projector outside of the required temperature range below: 32 to 122 °F (0 to 50 °C) at an altitude of 7500 feet (2286 m) or less, and 32 to 113 °F (0 to 45 °C) at an altitude of 7500 to 10000 feet (2287 to 3048 m) with a non-condensing humidity of 20 to 80%. Doing so may cause an unstable display and could lead to projector damage. Do not use or store the projector where it may be exposed to sudden changes in temperature. Light source brightness automatically dims if the surrounding temperature gets above 104 °F (40 °C) below 7500 feet (2286 m), or above 95 °F (35 °C) above 7500 feet (2286 m).

What precautions should I take around the projector’s exhaust vents?

Do not place anything that can become warped or damaged by heat near the exhaust vents. Do not bring your hands or face close to the vents while projection is in progress. Do not bring your face close to the projector while it is in use.

Where should I avoid placing the projector?

Do not place the projector on an unstable cart, stand, or table.

How should I clean the projector?

Unplug the projector from the wall outlet and allow to cool before cleaning. Use a dry cloth (or, for stubborn dirt or stains, a moist cloth that has been wrung dry) for cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners, any sprays containing flammable gas, or solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner, or benzine.

Can I open the projector’s case?

Do not open the projector’s case. The projector contains a high-powered laser.

Can I disassemble or modify the projector?

Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the projector. The projector contains a high-power laser component. Serious injury could result.

Where should I avoid storing the projector?

Do not store the projector outdoors for an extended length of time. Do not use or store the projector where it may be exposed to smoke, steam, corrosive gases, excessive dust, vibration, or shock.

When should I unplug the projector?

Unplug the projector when it will not be used for extended periods.

What is the recommended temperature and humidity range for storing the projector?

Do not store the projector outside of the required temperature range of 14 to 140 °F (–10 to 60 °C) with non-condensing humidity of 20 to 80% or in direct sunlight for long periods of time. Doing so may cause damage to the case.

What precautions should I take before moving the projector?

Before you move the projector, make sure its power is turned off, the plug is disconnected from the outlet, and all cables are disconnected.

How should I dispose of the projector?

When disposing of the projector, do not disassemble it. Dispose of the projector in accordance with your local or national laws and regulations.

What are the laser safety instructions for this projector?

Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for conformance as a Risk Group 2 LIP as defined in IEC 62471-5: Ed. 1.0. For more information see Laser Notice No. 57, dated May 8, 2019. This projector is a Class 1 laser product that complies with the IEC/EN60825-1:2014 international standard for lasers. Follow these safety instructions when using the projector.

What are the warnings regarding the projector’s laser?

Do not open the projector’s case. The projector contains a high-powered laser. Possibly hazardous optical radiation emitted from this product. Do not look at operating light source. Eye injury may result. As with any bright source, do not stare into the beam, RG2 IEC/EN 62471-5:2015. This projector may become RG3 when an interchangeable lens with a throw ratio greater than 3.6 is installed. Refer to the lens list and hazard distance before operation. Such combinations of projector and lens are intended for professional use only, and are not intended for consumer use. Operators shall control access to the beam within the hazard distance or install the product at a height that will prevent eye exposure within the hazard distance. No direct exposure to the beam shall be permitted.

What precautions should I take when disposing of the projector?

Do not disassemble the projector when disposing of it. Dispose according to your local or national laws and regulations.

Where can I find additional laser safety cautions and general safety instructions?

Note: See the link below for additional safety laser cautions and other general safety instructions.

What do the laser safety labels on the projector indicate?

Labels are attached to the projector to indicate the level of risk when operating or servicing the projector.

What is the recommended mounting position for the projector?

WARNING: MOUNT ABOVE THE HEADS OF CHILDREN. The use of a ceiling mount is recommended with this product to place it above the eyes of children.

What precautions should I take when turning on the projector remotely?

When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make sure no one is looking into the lens.

Can children operate the projector?

Do not allow small children to operate the projector. Children must be accompanied by an adult.

Why should I avoid looking into the lens during projection?

Do not look into the lens during projection. Also, do not look into the lens using optical devices, such as a magnifying glass or telescope. This could cause visual impairment.

In what applications should I consider using fail-safes and redundancies with the projector?

When this product is used for applications requiring high reliability/safety such as transportation devices related to aviation, rail, marine, automotive; disaster prevention devices; various safety devices; or functional/precision devices, you should use this product only after giving consideration to including fail-safes and redundancies into your design to maintain safety and total system reliability.

Is the projector suitable for use in aerospace equipment, main communication equipment, nuclear power control equipment, or medical equipment related to direct medical care?

Because this product was not intended for use in applications requiring extremely high reliability/safety such as aerospace equipment, main communication equipment, nuclear power control equipment, or medical equipment related to direct medical care, please make your own judgment on this product’s suitability after a full evaluation.

What does the safety symbol “ON” (power) indicate?

To indicate connection to the mains.

What does the safety symbol “OFF” (power) indicate?

To indicate disconnection from the mains.

What does the safety symbol “Stand-by” indicate?

To identify the switch or switch position by means of which part of the equipment is switched on in order to bring it into the stand-by condition.

What does the safety symbol “Caution” indicate?

To identify general caution when using the product.

What does the safety symbol “Caution, hot surface” indicate?

To indicate that the marked item can be hot and should not be touched without taking care.

What does the safety symbol “Caution, risk of electric shock” indicate?

To identify equipment that has a risk of electric shock.

What does the safety symbol “For indoor use only” indicate?

To identify electrical equipment designed primarily for indoor use.

What does the safety symbol “Polarity of DC power connector” indicate?

To identify the positive and negative connections (the polarity) on a piece of equipment to which a DC power supply may be connected.

What does the safety symbol “Battery, general” indicate?

On battery powered equipment. To identify a device, for instance a cover for the battery compartment, or the connector terminals.

What does the safety symbol “Positioning of cell” indicate?

To identify the battery holder itself and to identify the positioning of the cell(s) inside the battery holder.

What does the safety symbol “Protective earth” indicate?

To identify any terminal which is intended for connection to an external conductor for protection against electric shock in case of a fault, or the terminal of a protective earth electrode.

What does the safety symbol “Earth” indicate?

To identify an earth (ground) terminal in cases where neither the symbol No.13 is explicitly required.

What does the safety symbol “Alternating current” indicate?

To indicate on the rating plate that the equipment is suitable for alternating current only; to identify relevant terminals.

What does the safety symbol “Direct current” indicate?

To indicate on the rating plate that the equipment is suitable for direct current only; to identify relevant terminals.

What does the safety symbol “Class II equipment” indicate?

To identify equipment meeting the safety requirements specified for Class II equipment according to IEC 61140.

What does the safety symbol “General prohibition” indicate?

To identify actions or operations that are prohibited.

What does the safety symbol “Contact prohibition” indicate?

To indicate injury that could occur due to touching a specific part of the equipment.

What does the safety symbol “Never look into the optical lens while the projector is on” indicate?

Never look into the optical lens while the projector is on.

What does the safety symbol “To indicate that the marked item is not placed on projector” indicate?

To indicate that the marked item is not placed on the projector.

What does the safety symbol “Caution, laser radiation” indicate?

To indicate the equipment has a laser radiation part.

What does the safety symbol “Disassembly prohibition” indicate?

To indicate a risk of injury, such as electric shock, if the equipment is disassembled.

What does the safety symbol “Standby, partial standby” indicate?

To indicate that part of the equipment is in the ready status.

What does the safety symbol “Caution, movable parts” indicate?

To indicate that you must keep away from movable parts according to protection standards.

What does the safety symbol “Caution (moving fan blades)” indicate?

As a safety precaution, stay away from the moving fan blades.

What does the safety symbol “Caution (sharp corners)” indicate?

To indicate sharp corners that should not be touched.

What does the safety symbol “To indicate that looking into the lens while projecting is prohibited” indicate?

To indicate that looking into the lens while projecting is prohibited.

What does the safety symbol “Warning, optical radiation (such as UV, visible light, IR)” indicate?

Taking care to avoid injury to eyes and skin when in the vicinity of optical radiation.

What does the safety symbol “Not to be used in residential areas” indicate?

To identify electrical equipment which is not suitable for a residential area.

What are the FCC compliance requirements for this projector in the United States?

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference, and
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

What should users do if this equipment causes interference to radio and television reception?

If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

What type of equipment interface cable should be used with this projector?

The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this device and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has more than one interface connector, do not leave cables connected to unused interfaces.

What could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment?

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

What are the ICES compliance requirements for this projector in Canada?

CAN ICES-003(B)/NMB-003(B)

Who is the manufacturer of this projector?

Seiko Epson Corporation

What is the address of the manufacturer?

3-5, Owa 3-chome, Suwa-shi, Nagano-ken 392-8502 Japan

What is the telephone number of the manufacturer?

81-266-52-3131

Who is the importer of this projector?

Epson America, Inc.

What is the address of the importer?

3131 Katella Avenue, Los Alamitos 90720 U.S.A.

What is the telephone number of the importer?

(562) 981-3840

What types of disputes are covered by the Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver?

All Disputes between you and Epson. The term “Dispute” is meant to have the broadest meaning permissible under law and includes any dispute, claim, controversy, or action between you and Epson arising out of or relating to this Agreement, Epson branded products (hardware and including any related software), or other transaction involving you and Epson, whether in contract, warranty, misrepresentation, fraud, tort, intentional tort, statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other legal or equitable basis. “DISPUTE” DOES NOT INCLUDE IP CLAIMS, or more specifically, a claim or cause of action for (a) trademark infringement or dilution, (b) patent infringement, © copyright infringement or misuse, or (d) trade secret misappropriation (an “IP Claim”).

How will disputes be resolved?

You and Epson agree that all Disputes shall be resolved by binding arbitration according to this Agreement.

What does arbitration mean for the user?

ARBITRATION MEANS THAT YOU WAIVE YOUR RIGHT TO A JUDGE OR JURY IN A COURT PROCEEDING AND YOUR GROUNDS FOR APPEAL ARE LIMITED.

What entity will administer binding arbitration?

Pursuant to this Agreement, binding arbitration shall be administered by JAMS, a nationally recognized arbitration authority, pursuant to its code of procedures then in effect for consumer-related disputes, but excluding any rules that permit joinder or class actions in arbitration.

What law governs the interpretation and enforcement of the Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver section?

The Federal Arbitration Act (9 U.S.C. §1, et seq.) governs the interpretation and enforcement of this Section 1.

What is the nature of the agreement memorialized in this section?

This Agreement memorializes a transaction in interstate commerce.

Will the Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver section survive termination of the Agreement?

This Section 1 shall survive termination of this Agreement.

What are the pre-arbitration steps and notice requirements?

Before submitting a claim for arbitration, you and Epson agree to try, for sixty (60) days, to resolve any Dispute informally. If Epson and you do not reach an agreement to resolve the Dispute within the sixty (60) days, you or Epson may commence an arbitration. Notice to Epson must be addressed to: Epson America, Inc., ATTN: Legal Department, 3131 Katella Ave., Los Alamitos, CA 90720 (the “Epson Address”). The Dispute Notice to you will be sent to the most recent address Epson has in its records for you.

How can users update their address with Epson?

It is important to notify us if your address changes by emailing us at EAILegal@ea.epson.com or writing us at the Epson Address above.

What information should be included in the notice of dispute?

Notice of the Dispute shall include the sender’s name, address and contact information, the facts giving rise to the Dispute, and the relief requested (the “Dispute Notice”).

What should the parties do following receipt of the Dispute Notice?

Following receipt of the Dispute Notice, Epson and you agree to act in good faith to resolve the Dispute before commencing arbitration.

Can an individual action be brought in small claims court?

Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may bring an individual action in the small claims court of your state or municipality if the action is within that court’s jurisdiction and is pending only in that court.

Can users participate in class actions or class arbitrations?

YOU AND EPSON AGREE THAT EACH PARTY MAY BRING DISPUTES AGAINST THE OTHER PARTY ONLY IN AN INDIVIDUAL CAPACITY, AND NOT AS A PLAINTIFF OR CLASS MEMBER IN ANY CLASS OR REPRESENTATIVE PROCEEDING, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION FEDERAL OR STATE CLASS ACTIONS, OR CLASS ARBITRATIONS. CLASS ACTION LAWSUITS, CLASS-WIDE ARBITRATIONS, PRIVATE ATTORNEY-GENERAL ACTIONS, AND ANY OTHER PROCEEDING WHERE SOMEONE ACTS IN A REPRESENTATIVE CAPACITY ARE NOT ALLOWED.

Can an arbitrator combine or consolidate more than one party’s claims?

ACCORDINGLY, UNDER THE ARBITRATION PROCEDURES OUTLINED IN THIS SECTION, AN ARBITRATOR SHALL NOT COMBINE OR CONSOLIDATE MORE THAN ONE PARTY’S CLAIMS WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF ALL AFFECTED PARTIES TO AN ARBITRATION PROCEEDING.

What rules govern the arbitration process?

If you or Epson commences arbitration, the arbitration shall be governed by the rules of JAMS that are in effect when the arbitration is filed, excluding any rules that permit arbitration on a class or representative basis (the “JAMS Rules”), available at http://www.jamsadr.com or by calling 1-800-352-5267 (U.S. or Canada), or https://www.jamsadr.com/about/ or by calling +1-949-224-1810 (Latin America), and under the rules set forth in this Agreement.

How many arbitrators will resolve disputes?

All Disputes shall be resolved by a single neutral arbitrator, and both parties shall have a reasonable opportunity to participate in the selection of the arbitrator.

What is the arbitrator bound by?

The arbitrator is bound by the terms of this Agreement.

Who has exclusive authority to resolve disputes?

The arbitrator, and not any federal, state, or local court or agency, shall have exclusive authority to resolve all disputes arising out of or relating to the interpretation, applicability, enforceability, or formation of this Agreement, including any claim that all or any part of this Agreement is void or voidable.

What is a court allowed to determine regarding claims?

Notwithstanding this broad delegation of authority to the arbitrator, a court may determine the limited question of whether a claim or cause of action is for an IP Claim, which is excluded from the definition of “Disputes” in Section 1.1 above.

What relief can the arbitrator grant?

The arbitrator shall be empowered to grant whatever relief would be available in a court under law or in equity. The arbitrator may award you the same damages as a court could and may award declaratory or injunctive relief only in favor of the individual party seeking relief and only to the extent necessary to provide relief warranted by that party’s individual claim.

Can the costs of arbitration exceed the costs of litigation?

In some instances, the costs of arbitration can exceed the costs of litigation, and the right to discovery may be more limited in arbitration than in court.

What is the nature of the arbitrator’s award?

The arbitrator’s award is binding and may be entered as a judgment in any court of competent jurisdiction.

What options are available for participating in arbitration hearings?

You may choose to engage in arbitration hearings by telephone. Arbitration hearings not conducted by telephone shall take place in a location reasonably accessible from your primary residence or in Orange County, California, at your option.

What is the procedure for initiating an arbitration proceeding?

If either you or Epson decides to arbitrate a Dispute, both parties agree to the following procedure:

(i) Write a Demand for Arbitration. The demand must include a description of the Dispute and the amount of damages sought to be recovered. You can find a copy of a Demand for Arbitration at http://www.jamsadr.com (“Demand for Arbitration”).
(ii) Send three copies of the Demand for Arbitration, plus the appropriate filing fee, to: JAMS, 500 North State College Blvd., Suite 600 Orange, CA 92868, U.S.A.
(iii) Send one copy of the Demand for Arbitration to the other party (same address as the Dispute Notice), or as otherwise agreed by the parties.

What is the format for the arbitration hearing?

During the arbitration, the amount of any settlement offer made shall not be disclosed to the arbitrator until after the arbitrator determines the amount, if any, to which you or Epson is entitled. The discovery or exchange of non-privileged information relevant to the Dispute may be allowed during the arbitration.

Who is responsible for arbitration fees?

Epson shall pay, or (if applicable) reimburse you for, all JAMS filings and arbitrator fees for any arbitration commenced (by you or Epson) pursuant to provisions of this Agreement.

What happens if the arbitrator’s decision results in an award in favor of the user for disputes involving $75,000 or less in damages?

For Disputes in which you or Epson seeks $75,000 or less in damages exclusive of attorney’s fees and costs, if the arbitrator’s decision results in an award to you in an amount greater than Epson’s last written offer, if any, to settle the Dispute, Epson will:

(i) pay you $1,000 or the amount of the award, whichever is greater;
(ii) pay you twice the amount of your reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(iii) reimburse you for any expenses (including expert witness fees and costs) that your attorney reasonably accrues for investigating, preparing, and pursuing the Dispute in arbitration.

Except as agreed upon by you and Epson in writing, the arbitrator shall determine the amount of fees, costs, and expenses to be paid by Epson pursuant to this Section 1.6d).

Will Epson seek its attorney’s fees and expenses for arbitration?

Epson will not seek its attorney’s fees and expenses for any arbitration commenced involving a Dispute under this Agreement.

Does the user’s right to attorney’s fees and expenses under Section 1.6d) limit their rights to attorney’s fees and expenses under applicable law?

Your right to attorney’s fees and expenses under Section 1.6d) above does not limit your rights to attorney’s fees and expenses under applicable law; notwithstanding the foregoing, the arbitrator may not award duplicative awards of attorney’s fees and expenses.

How can users opt out of the arbitration procedure and class action waiver?

You may elect to opt out (exclude yourself) from the final, binding individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this Agreement by sending a written letter to the Epson Address within thirty (30) days of your assent to this Agreement (including without limitation the purchase, download, installation of the Software or other applicable use of Epson Hardware, products, and services) that specifies

(i) your name,
(ii) your mailing address, and
(iii) your request to be excluded from the final, binding individual arbitration procedure and waiver of class and representative proceedings specified in this Section 1.

In the event that you opt out consistent with the procedure set forth above, all other terms shall continue to apply, including the requirement to provide notice prior to litigation.

How will future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and class action waiver provisions be handled?

Notwithstanding any provision in this Agreement to the contrary, you and Epson agree that if Epson makes any future amendments to the dispute resolution procedure and class action waiver provisions (other than a change to Epson’s address) in this Agreement, Epson will obtain your affirmative assent to the applicable amendment. If you do not affirmatively assent to the applicable amendment, you are agreeing that you will arbitrate any Dispute between the parties in accordance with the language of this Section 1 (or resolve disputes as provided for in Section 1.7, if you timely elected to opt out when you first assented to this Agreement).

What happens if any provision in the Binding Arbitration and Class Waiver section is found to be unenforceable?

If any provision in this Section 1 is found to be unenforceable, that provision shall be severed with the remainder of this Agreement remaining in full force and effect. The foregoing shall not apply to the prohibition against class or representative actions as provided in Section 1.5. This means that if Section 1.5 is found to be unenforceable, the entire Section 1 (but only Section 1) shall be null and void.

Which trademarks are registered trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation?

EPSON®, EasyMP®, Instant Off®, and Quick Corner®

Which trademark is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation?

Epson iProjection

Which logomark is a registered logomark of Seiko Epson Corporation?

EPSON Exceed Your Vision

Which trademark is a registered trademark of Epson America, Inc.?

PrivateLine®

Which trademarks are trademarks of Epson America, Inc.?

SizeWiseTM and PixAlignTM

Which trademarks are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries?

Mac, macOS, and OS X

Which trademark is a registered trademark of Google LLC?

Google®

Which trademarks are trademarks of Google LLC?

AndroidTM and ChromebookTM

Which trademark is a trademark of the Microsoft group of companies?

Windows

Which trademark is a trademark of the HDBaseT Alliance?

HDBaseTTM

What is Epson’s disclaimer regarding trademarks?

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners. Epson disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

What are the restrictions on reproducing or transmitting any part of the publication?

No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Seiko Epson Corporation.

What is Epson’s disclaimer regarding the use of information contained in the publication?

The information contained herein is designed only for use with this Epson product. Epson is not responsible for any use of this information as applied to other products.

What is Epson’s disclaimer regarding damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by the purchaser or third parties?

Neither Seiko Epson Corporation nor its affiliates shall be liable to the purchaser of this product or third parties for damages, losses, costs, or expenses incurred by purchaser or third parties as a result of:

accident, misuse, or abuse of this product or unauthorized modifications, repairs, or alterations to this product, or (excluding the U.S.) failure to strictly comply with Seiko Epson Corporation’s operating and maintenance instructions.

What is Epson’s disclaimer regarding the use of options or consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products?

Seiko Epson Corporation shall not be liable for any damages or problems arising from the use of any options or any consumable products other than those designated as Original Epson Products or Epson Approved Products by Seiko Epson Corporation.

Is the information in the publication subject to change?

This information is subject to change without notice.

What is Epson’s encouragement regarding the responsible use of copyrighted materials?

Epson encourages each user to be responsible and respectful of the copyright laws when using any Epson product.

What is Epson’s statement regarding the limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material?

While some countries’ laws permit limited copying or reuse of copyrighted material in certain circumstances, those circumstances may not be as broad as some people assume.

Who should users contact for questions regarding copyright law?

Contact your legal advisor for any questions regarding copyright law.

Who owns the copyright of this publication?

What is the publication date?

5/24

What is the document control number?

CPD-64101R2

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF MANUAL

EPSON EB-PQ2010W (01) PDF SUMMARY:

Visitors also searched:

Leave comments, questions, reviews, tips, tricks, hacks or page errors below. Account not required.Cancel reply

Discover more from Manual-Hub.com